Ultimate Yoga 2012. Free E-Book

Ultimate Yoga 2012
I School of Out-of-Body Travel

A Practical Guide oo!
Michael Raduga
www.obe4u.com Translated by Peter Orange
Buy hard co"y of thi# e- oo! o$

www.obe4u.com
This book is free via internet, so feel free to distribute it! Send it to all your friends! Post it on your sites and blogs! Semi$ar# i$ %alifor$ia&
http://school.obe4u.com/
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other works of M. Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com
Table of Contents:
Part 1..............................................................................................5 ntering the Phase !tate.................................................................5 "hapter 1 # $eneral %ackground..............................................5 "hapter 2 # &ndirect Techni'ues.............................................1( "hapter ) # *irect Techni'ues................................................5+ "hapter + # %ecoming "onscious ,hile *reaming...............-. "hapter 5 # /on0autonomous Methods...................................(. Part &&.............................................................................................1 Managing the Out0of0%ody 1perience........................................1 "hapter - 0 *eepening..............................................................1 "hapter ( 0 Maintaining........................................................122 "hapter 3 0 Primary skills......................................................11+ "hapter . 0 Translocation and 4inding Ob5ects.....................1)2 "hapter 12 0 6pplication.......................................................1+5 Part &&&........................................................................................1-5 6u1iliary &nformation................................................................1-5 "hapter 11 # 7seful Tips.......................................................1-5 "hapter 12 # Practitioners8 1periences...............................1(2 "hapter 1) 0 Putting a 4ace on the Phenomenon..................1.( "hapter 1+ # 4inal Test.........................................................22+ 6ppendi1....................................................................................21+
%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com
'O()*O(+ This guidebook is the result of ten years of e1tremely acti9e personal practice and study of the out0of0body phenomenon:the phase;< coupled with ha9ing successfully taught it to thousands of people. & know all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run into when getting to know this phenomenon< and ha9e tried to protect future practitioners from them in this book. This guidebook was not created for those who prefer light< empty reading. &t is for those who would like to learn something. &t contains no speculations or stories< only dry< hard facts and techni'ues in combination with a completely pragmatic approach and clear procedures for action. They ha9e all been successfully 9erified by a 9ast number of practitioners that often had no prior e1perience. &n order to achie9e the same result< it is only necessary to read through each section thoroughly and complete the assignments. The book is beneficial not only for beginners< but also for those who already know what it feels like to ha9e an out0of0body encounter and ha9e a certain amount of e1perience< as this guidebook is de9oted not only to entering the state< but also e'ually dedicated to controlling it. "ontrary to popular opinion< there is nothing difficult about this phenomenon if one tries to attain it with regular and right effort. On a9erage< results are reached in less than a week if attempts are made e9ery day. More often than not< the techni'ues work in literally a couple of attempts. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel January 11, 2 !
Part 1 )$teri$g the Pha#e State
%ha"ter 1 , Ge$eral Bac!grou$d

Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 2 12 Transfor#ation*) +t also contains #any illustrative e,a#ples fro# the author-s o$n personal e,perience) T-) )SS).%) O' T-) P-AS) P-).O/).O. The term phase state :or simply phase; encompasses a number of widely known dissociati9e phenomena< many of which are referred to by 9arious terms< such as astral or out-of-"ody e,perience. This concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea#ing< but does not always e1ist in the sense and form implied by that e1pression. =ence< the term phase has been introduced to ease the study of phenomena that e1ist beyond habitual # and often unfair 0 associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e,perience is accurate to the e1tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person e1periencing the phase phenomenon. . phase has t$o pri#ary attri"utes/ 1)0 practitioners possess full, conscious a$areness during the e,perience, and 2)0 practitioners recogni1e a genuine separation fro# the physical "ody) !imultaneously< the degree to which practitioners percei9e the phase en9ironment affects the le9el of sensory e1periences therein< which often occur in a higher form than the sensory e1periences of wakefulness. This concept is difficult to imagine 5
without firsthand e1perience of the phase. 6nd so< it is not without reason that this practice is considered to be a higher state of self0hypnosis or meditation< and is often referred to under different names as the highest possible human achie9ement in 9arious religious and mystical mo9ements :yoga< %uddhism< etc.;.
&n essence< the phase is an une1plored state of mind where one is unable to control and feel his physical body. &nstead< his space perception is filled with realistic phantom e1periences. Interesting Fact! Sensations in the phase state can "e so realistic that practitioners $ho unintentionally enter phase often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that the e,perience is occurring in the $a%ing state) These types of unintended e,cursions #ost often occur at night or early in the #orning) &t is belie9ed that up to one 'uarter of the human population has encountered this phenomenon. =owe9er< if 9ariations and different degrees of intensity of the state are taken into consideration< it may be safely assumed that e9eryone has encountered the phase. !ince the phase is a rare sub5ect of study< -
many who inad9ertently enter it do not reali>e what has taken place once they return to wakefulness. Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase en9ironment that is not fully formed because shallow phases don8t lea9e the same 5olting impression as deep states. lusi9e as the phase may seem< this is an e1tremely common phenomenon< accessible to anyone willing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of achie9ing and maintaining the phase. *-Y ).T)( T-) P-AS)0 !uch a 'uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the properties of the phenomenon and its nature. ,hen one suddenly understands at a certain moment that he is 5ust as real as he normally is< and is standing somewhere that is not in the physical world with his same hands and body< and can touch e9erything around him and discern fine details< such much emotion stirs up inside him that no 'uestions arise at all. This is the #ost a#a1ing e,perience that a person can attain2 The initial phase encounter is always 5olting and sometimes frightening. *epending on the indi9idual< fear e1perienced during initial encounters with the phase occurs in about one0third of all cases. 9en 9eteran practitioners encounter fear< which speaks to the profound nature of the phase state. ,ith time< as rapture ebbs and emotions wane< thoughts turn from the fact of the phenomenon itself towards how to somehow use it. 6nd here< a fantastically di9erse field of practical application opens up before the practitioner. These applications # which this book communicates # are not to be associated with the many unpro9en and dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The information presented herein is 9erifiable< practical< and attainable. ,hate9er the nature of the phase 0 a state of mind< or perhaps an e1ternal e1perience 0 this is the sole opportunity to? 9isit any part of the world or uni9erse@ see people who are out0of0 reach in real life< including relati9es< the deceased< celebrities< and 9arious creatures@ communicate with the enormous resources of the subconscious mind and obtain information from it@ reali>e (
desires that are unattainable in real life@ model artistic productions@ influence physiology< and more. These are not dull e1periences. They are eminently personal and real. T-) 1I')STY1) O' A P(A%TITIO.)( &t must be said that 9arious diets< e1ercises< rituals< and so forth do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of the phase. /aturally e1istent psychological and physiological comfort is of the utmost importance. Thus< methods recommending o9ereating< under0eating< or tormenting oneself with 9arious diets and strange e1ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a practitioner8s wellness and balance< in9ariably producing a negati9e impact to the effecti9eness of techni'ues taught in this guidebook. 6dditionally< no meaningful association has been found between practice of the phase and what may be construed as Abad habitsB. Regardless of a lifestyle8s null effect on phase achie9ement< a healthy< acti9e lifestyle will always be recommended to en5oy a good 'uality of li9ing. Interesting Fact! +f one "elieves that it is necessary to position one3s "ed $ith the head"oard facing the 4orth$est or so#e other direction in order to have #ore effective out-of-"ody e,periences, then doing so $ill invaria"ly have a positive effect on results) 5o$ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a%in to an intention, $hich in turn is enor#ously i#portant) &t has been obser9ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle increases the fre'uency of genuine< lasting phase e1periences. !leeping normally and soundly is the most basic e1ample of a lifestyle choice that produces direct< positi9e impact on results< especially when a practitioner commits to a full nightCs rest se9eral times a week. 3
A1GO(IT-/ 'O( /AST)(I.G T-) P-AS) 6 no9ice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of se9eral primary steps< each of which is a uni'ue science unto itself. 1. The first and most important step addresses the techni'ues used to enter the phase state. &t is not necessary to master e9ery type of entrance techni'ue :direct< indirect< dream consciousness;. Dearning and applying the easiest techni'ues pro9ides the necessary prere'uisites to more ad9anced methods. &f so desired< it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni'ues in parallel with the mo9ing on to the subse'uent steps for mastering the phase. 2. "ontrary to popular opinion< the need for conscious techni'ues does not cease upon phase entrance. &t is absolutely necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to achie9e a consistently hyper0realistic en9ironment. 4ailing to apply deepening techni'ues almost guarantees that e1periences will be dull< uninteresting< and subse'uent practice short0li9ed. Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening techni'ues after mastering any one entrance method. ). The third step in9ol9es mastering techni'ues for maintaining the phase< as without them the a9erage person would ha9e phase e1periences of much shorter duration than is possible. ,hen in the phase< the 'uestion of how to lea9e it almost ne9er occurs. On the contrary< one is normally thrust from it in the course of se9eral seconds if one simply does nothing. +. 6fter learning all the necessary techni'ues for mastering the phase state< it is time to learn and apply methods of control< which encompass the ability to translocate< find and interact with ob5ects< influence surroundings< and so forth. .
5. Once the pre9iously noted steps ha9e been accomplished< a practitioner may proceed to apply phase e1periences to enhance e9eryday life. O9er the course of this guidebook< we will e1amine do>ens of these 9aluable applications in great detail.
,ith basic skills mastered< remember that practicing the phase is worthwhile and effecti9e only when the results are consistent. &f a practitioner enters the phase only once a month< the e1perience will be too emotional to allow the obser9ation of important principles and methodologies. The phase should be encountered at least once a week. ,orking toward a le9el higher than a weekly phase entry is ambitious< e9en beneficial. Realistically< two to four phase e1periences per week might be considered the le9el of a grandmaster< but this is far from the upward boundary. 6s a rule< no9ice practitioners achie9e the phase less often than is desired. =owe9er< with regular attempts< success occurs more and more fre'uently< which should help alle9iate any frustration resulting from failed attempts. TYP)S O' T)%-.I2U)S There are three primary types of techni'ues that make it possible to enter the phase? direct< indirect and drea# consciousness. These methods are performed while lying down or reclining< eyes closed< the body in a state of total rela1ation. 12
Interesting Fact! Often, people have an out-of"ody e,perience $ithout prior %no$ledge or "elief in the pheno#enon) +t 6ust happens, and a large "ody of evidence has "een gathered to support this fact) 7ven #ore interesting is that spontaneous e,periences often occur after a "rief study of #aterial a"out the topic, li%e this guide"oo%))) 8irect techni9ues are perfor#ed $ithout any noticea"le lapse in consciousness) :hile practicing direct techni9ues, a lapse into sleep for less than ; #inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni9ue) %y definition< direct techni'ues encompass the performance of specific actions for a pre0defined inter9al of time. !uccessfully applied< direct methods result in a phase entrance without passing through any intermediary states. 4or .2E of the population< these techni'ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e1ists in an e1cessi9ely acti9e state. &t has been clearly pro9en within the !chool8s student body that no9ice practitioners do not benefit from beginning a training regimen with direct techni'ues. This is because direct techni'ues re'uire a thorough understanding and masterful application of indirect techni'ues in order to be effecti9e. The incorrect notion that the phase state is e1tremely difficult to enter is due to the fact that people are more often drawn to the more difficult direct techni'ues. &t is always better to approach direct techni'ues only after becoming e1pert in the use of indirect techni'ues. +ndirect techni9ues are techni9ues that are put into practice upon a$a%ening fro# sleep) The effecti9eness of indirect techni'ues is not dependent on the length of the prere'uisite sleep cycle. &ndirect techni'ues can be used while e1iting a full night8s sleep< after a daytime catnap< or following se9eral hours of deep sleep. The most 11
important thing is that there is a lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the techni'ues. &ndirect techni'ues are the easiest techni'ues to practice< which is why many practitioners use them to enter the phase. !leep naturally pro9ides the mind with deep rela1ation< which is often difficult to ac'uire by other methods. !ince sleep is re'uired to perform indirect techni'ues< it is a con9enient< oft0occurring means to conduct e1periments with the phase. /o9ice practitioners benefit greatly from the use of indirect techni'ues< and learn firsthand the possibility of phase entrance. 8rea# consciousness is ac9uired "y techni9ues that allo$ entrance to the phase through $hat is co##only referred to as lucid drea#ing) &n this case< the phase begins when the awareness that a dream is occurring happens within the dream itself. 6fter becoming conscious while dreaming< se9eral types of actions can be performed< including returning to the body and rolling out< which will be described later. ,hen deepening techni'ues are applied in the conte1t of a conscious dream< the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal wakefulness. Techni'ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually categori>ed separately from methods used to perform out0of0body tra9el@ in practice< howe9er< it is apparent that the characteristics of dream consciousness and out0of0body tra9el are identical< which places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are difficult because< unlike other techni'ues< they do not in9ol9e specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 6 large measure of preparatory steps must be obser9ed that re'uire time and effort without any guarantee of results. =owe9er< dream consciousness techni'ues are not as difficult as direct techni'ues. Moreo9er< the ma5ority of practitioners< whether using indirect or direct techni'ues< e1perience spontaneous awareness while dreaming without ha9ing to apply techni'ues aimed at dream consciousness. &n addition to the techni'ues described abo9e< there are also non0autonomous means and tools? 9arious de9ices< programs< 12
e1ternal influences< and so forth< which can be used to enter the phase. &t is necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners who are able to enter the phase without supplementary assistance. Farious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha9e been recommended to assist phase entrance< though using them is unlikely to do any good< and use of these has ne9er yielded the effect that can be achie9ed through unadulterated practice. 6s such< the use of a chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable. %O.T(AI.+I%ATIO.S 1act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous # or e9en safe 0 does not e1ist@ there has ne9er been an e1hausti9e< controlled study to pro9e either supposition. =owe9er< since the phase e1ists at the fringes of naturally0 occurring states of mind< it can hardly be assumed dangerous. /otably< the phase is accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement :R M;< which e9ery human e1periences for up to 2 hours each night< and this begins to e1plain the phase e1perience as entirely safe and natural. 6lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase on the physical mind and body@ namely< the emotional effects that can occur during the onset of the phase state. Phase entry is a 9ery profound< incredible e1perience that may induce fear< which is in9oked by a natural instinct for self0 preser9ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for no9ices and those poorly ac'uainted with the nature of the phenomenon and techni'ues used to control it. ,ithout knowledge and proper practice< a fear0induced reaction can escalate into full0blown terror. 6fter all< while in the phase< fantasy 'uickly becomes reality< and reticent fears can take on hyper0realistic 'ualities. ,hen this occurs< it8s not the phase en9ironment< but the fear that is treacherous. &t goes without saying that fear is a to1ic influence< especially to sensiti9e souls< the elderly< and people with physical ailments< like certain cardio9ascular conditions. This does not mean that persons in 1)
these groups should abstain from practicing the phase. The solution is to learn about and a9oid common stressors associated with the practice< know the mechanics of controlling ob5ects< and understand the principles of making an emergency e1it. $i9en the possibility of negati9e phase e1periences< it could be ad9ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes< though it is 'uite e1ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration. Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and moti9ated by the fact that natural R M does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes< and< at the risk of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles< e1periments directed at unnaturally prolonging R M are not recommended. ()%O//).+ATIO.S 'O( USI.G T-) GUI+)BOO3 *uring classroom instruction at the !chool of Out0of0 %ody Tra9el< se9eral key factors are known to produce positi9e and negati9e effects toward the likelihood of success during indi9idual practice? Po#itive )ffect o$ Practice 6ttenti9e< thorough study of the course material "onsistent work with practical elements. *iligent completion of technical elements. 6 rela1ed approach to the sub5ect matter. Heeping a 5ournal of all initial attempts< followed by recording successful phase entrances. 6dhering to the recommended number of daily entrance attempts. 1+ .egative )ffect o$ Practice =asty and inattenti9e study of course materials. &nconsistent application of techni'ues. 6ppro1imating the techni'ues outside of recommended guidelines. 6 hysterical approach to the matter< AidGe fi1eB. 6 lack of personal analysis when problems or a lack of success are encountered. 1cessi9e number of attempts per day.
Regular attempts and practice. 7nderstanding that the author knows his field well
!poradic practice regimen. A& also know e9erything & need to and will do as & wantI. This attitude is good only for those who ha9e a great amount of real practical e1perience. Reading a lot on the sub5ect or simply ha9ing knowledge of it is not e1perience.
)4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( 1 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hich alternati9e states are included in the term AphaseBJ 2. =ow does the phase differ from out0of0body tra9elJ ). &s the perception of reality different in waking life than in the phase worldJ +. *oes the phase ha9e applications to day0to0day lifeJ 5. ,hat skills must be learned before proceeding to practical use of the phaseJ -. =ow many types of autonomous phase entrance techni'ues are thereJ (. ,hat is the difference between direct and indirect techni'uesJ 3. ,hich techni'ues are easiest for the ma5ority of practitionersJ .. &s it worth trusting 9arious de9ices and programs that promise to be able to help one enter the phase stateJ ,hy or why notJ 12. !hould one eat meat when practicing the phaseJ Ta#!# 1. Try to remember if you ha9e e1perienced phase encounters in the past.
15
2. ).
&f you ha9e encountered the phase< what type of techni'ue gained entrance@ direct< indirect< or conscious dreamingJ &f possible< ask some friends and ac'uaintances about the sub5ect of out0of0body tra9el or conscious dreaming. *o any of them remember a similar e1perienceJ ,hat was it likeJ
Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 2 12 Transfor#ation*) +t also contains #any illustrative e,a#ples fro# the author-s o$n personal e,perience)
1-
%ha"ter 2 , I$direct Tech$i5ue#

T-) %O.%)PT O' I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S $enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun with the easiest< most accessible methods? indirect techni'ues< which are conscious actions performed upon awakening from sleep. !ome critics incorrectly assume that indirect techni'ues are not ideal< and prefer to start with direct techni'ues. =owe9er< doing so pro9ides no guarantee for success and results in a large amount of wasted time and effort. Starting practice $ith indirect techni9ues guarantees entrance into the phase) 6 specific uni9ersal techni'ue that suits e9ery practitioner is a myth since indi9iduals differ widely in personality< psychology< and learning speed. =owe9er< there is a relati9ely easy uni9ersal algorithm< or procedure< that accounts for the characteristics of each person and allows for the most rational< effecti9e way to attain the initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing of the indirect techni'ues co9ered in this chapter. ,ithout e1ception< these techni'ues 0 despite their 9arying degrees of difficulty 0 are suitable for e9ery practitioner who wishes to e1perience the phase. Results can be e1pected immediately following the first few attempts@ howe9er< to achie9e measurable results< an a9erage of fi9e daily< conscious attempts must be made. Making more than fi9e attempts o9er the course of a day is fine< too. There is nothing difficult to understand about performing the techni'ues since they are clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re#ar%a"ly, due to correctly practiced indirect techni9ues, #ore than half of students at the live school attain phase entrance after only t$o days)
1(
Interesting Fact! Many e,perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass the effort associated $ith direct techni9ues and hone their s%ills through the sole use of indirect techni9ues) &n order to ensure that one8s efforts are most fruitful and producti9e< we are going to indi9idually e1amine each step and principle behind the actions in great detail. Det us start from a description of the techni'ues themsel9es< which will actually apply practically 5ust as much to direct techni'ues as to indirect techni'ues@ as they only differ in character and length of application. There are plenty of techni'ues< so after practicing all of the indirect techni'ues presented in this chapter< a practitioner should be able to choose three or four of the most straightforward< indi9idually effecti9e methods. !eparation techni'ues will be e1amined later. They are completely different from usual techni'ues< which only bring one into the phase< but do not necessarily themsel9es lead to separation from the body. &t is often also necessary to know how to stop percei9ing one8s physical body after employing these techni'ues. &t is necessary to understand when to employ these techni'ues< and the importance of waking from sleep without opening the eyes or mo9ing the body. 6ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon awakening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it constitutes the main barrier to successful practice. 6fter e1amining the peripheral information surrounding indirect techni'ues< the cycles of indirect techni'ues will be e1amined< including what there are< how they work< and how they are best used. !uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these cycles. =owe9er< there are e1ceptions< and it is not completely necessary to proceed with these cycles if oneCs own mind somehow hints what e1actly one should start from< which we will also e1amine separately. 13
P(I/A(Y I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S 4ota Bene2 The techni'ues described below are the simple components of indirect techni'ue cycles. &mplementing each techni'ue8s description is far from effecti9e. Of the list gi9en below< it behoo9es the indi9idual practitioner to choose the most comprehensible and interesting techni'ues< then acti9ely study and apply the instructions for use. OBS)(6I.G I/AG)S Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Obser9e the blank space behind the eyes for ) to 5 seconds and try to locate recogni>able pictures< images< or symbols. &f nothing appears during this e1ercise< the techni'ue should be substituted. &f something appears< continue to passi9ely obser9e the images. Meanwhile< the images will become increasingly realistic< literally en9eloping the practitioner. *o not aggressi9ely e1amine the details of the image< or it will 9anish or change. The image should be e1perienced as a panorama< taking 1.
e9erything in. Obser9e the images as long as the 'uality and realism increases. *oing so yields two possible results? the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings< and has achie9ed the phase< or the image becomes borderline or absolutely realistic< and separation from the physical body is possible. Trai$i$g To train the use of this techni'ue< lie down in the dark< eyes closed< and obser9e the blackness for se9eral minutes< identifying any specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters< and then gradually transition to whole pictures< scenes< or scenarios. ,ith practice< this techni'ue is 9ery easy and straightforward. 6 common mistake made during practice of this techni'ue is when the practitioner aggressi9ely attempts to con5ure images 9ersus passi9ely obser9ing what is naturally presented. P-A.TO/ *IGG1I.G 7/O6)/).T8 Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Try to wiggle a part of the body for ) to 5 seconds< but without using any muscles. &f nothing mo9es during the attempt< try a different techni'ue. &f a sensation of wiggling occurs< e9en in the slightest< continue to employ the techni'ue< stri9ing to increase the range of mo9ement as much as possible. This techni'ue should be performed 9ery aggressi9ely< not passi9ely. 6s soon as the range of mo9ement nears or e1ceeds four inches 0 which may take 5ust se9eral seconds 0 the following situations may arise? one momentarily finds oneself somehow in the phase< or the wiggled part of the body begins to mo9e freely. The occurrence of mo9ement during practice of this techni'ue allows the practitioner to transition to a separation techni'ue and attempt to lea9e the body. ,hile practicing phantom wiggling< strong 9ibrations may occur< amid which separation may be attempted. !ounds also often arise< allowing the opportunity to practice listening in< which can lead to phase entrance. 22
The phantom wiggling techni'ue is not meant to produce an imagined mo9ement by a phantom body. The point of the techni'ue is to attempt the mo9ement of a physical body part without using muscular action. That is< the focus should rest upon an internal intention of mo9ement without physical action. ,hen the sensation occurs< it differs little from its real counterpart and is often accompanied by hea9iness and resistance. $enerally< there is 9ery little range of mo9ement at first< but with concentrated effort the range of mo9ement noticeably increases. &t does not matter which part of the body is used to e1ercise phantom mo9ement. &t may be the whole body or 5ust one finger. /either is the speed of the mo9ement important. &ncreased range of percei9ed mo9ement is the aim of the techni'ue. Trai$i$g To train the techni'ue of phantom wiggling< rela1 a hand for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. Then< aggressi9ely en9ision the following hand mo9ements< without mo9ing any muscles< for two to three minutes each? rotating< up0 down< left0right< e1tending the fingers and drawing the fingers together< clenching and unclenching a fist. /o sensations will occur at first. $radually< the sensation of muscular action will become so apparent that the percei9ed mo9ement will be indistinguishable from real mo9ement. *uring the first training attempts< practitioners are often tempted to open their eyes to see if actual mo9ement is occurring # that8s how real the sensation feels. 1IST).I.G I. Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. *o this for ) to 5 seconds without mo9ing and without opening the eyes. &f nothing happens during this period of time< switch to another techni'ue. &f any sounds like bu>>ing< humming< ra9ing< hissing< whistling< tinkling< or melodies occur< listen attenti9ely. ,ith results< the 21
sound will increase in 9olume. Disten in as long as there is some dynamism in the 9olume of the sound. ,hen the sound stops< or the noise becomes loud enough< a separation techni'ue may be attempted. !ometimes< the noise itself throws one into the phase while listening. 6t a certain stage< sounds may be e1tremely loud and ha9e e9en been described as comparable to the roar of a 5et0 engine. The action of listening in consists of acti9ely and attenti9ely e1ploring a sound< the whole of its tonality and range< and how it reacts to the listener. There is an optional techni'ue known as forced li#te$i$g i$< where it is simply necessary to strongly want to hear noise< and meanwhile make intuiti9e internal efforts< which< as a rule< are correct. Performed correctly< forced sounds will intensify the same way as those percei9ed with the standard listening in techni'ue. Trai$i$g &n order to practice listening in< lie down in a silent place< eyes closed< and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts are usually crowned with success within se9eral minutes of trying< and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely e9eryone has within. One simply has to know how to tune in to it. (OTATIO. Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. &magine the physical body is rotating along an a1is for 5 to 12 seconds. &f no unusual sensations occur< try another techni'ue. &f 9ibrations occur during rotation or the mo9ement suddenly feels realistic< then continue the rotation techni'ue as long as there is progress in the sensation8s de9elopment. There are se9eral possible outcomes when rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is replaced by a 9ery real sensation of rotating along an imagined a1is. ,hen this occurs< a practitioner may easily lea9e the body. The other outcome is the sudden presence of strong 9ibrations or loud sounds< amid which separation from 22
the body is possible. *uring rotation< separation has been known to spontaneously occur and the practitioner enters the phase. Trai$i$g To practice rotation< imagine re9ol9ing around the head0 to0foot a1is for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. &t is not necessary to focus on the 9isual effects of rotation or minute sensations in the body. The key factor is the 9estibular sensation that arises from internal rotation. 6s a rule< many practitioners e1perience difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to .2 degrees of mo9ement where another e1periences 132 degrees. ,ith consistent< correct practice< full )-2 degree rotation will occur. 'O(%)+ 'A11I.G AS1))P Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Picture a swift< compulsory fall into sleep for 5 to 12 seconds< and then return to wakefulness< followed by an aggressi9e attempt at separating from the physical body. $enerally< after performing this techni'ue< the practitioner8s state of mind 'uickly transitions between different states of brain. !trong 9ibrations often occur when emerging from this Apseudo0 sleepB< where the likelihood of separation from the body is increased< accompanied the opportunity to practice other techni'ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e1ercise. &n essence< forced falling asleep is a trick on the mind designed to take ad9antage of the brain8s refle1i9e responses to actions that immediately induce semi0conscious states that allow easy entrance into the phase. mploying it is especially effecti9e upon an e1tremely alert awakening< or after a mo9ement is unintentionally made upon awakening. 4orced sleep is 'uite simple. &t re'uires a cessation of internal dialogue< shifting mental focus away from e1ternal stimuli< and a strong desire for a 'uick reentrance to the sleeping state followed by renewed wakefulness after se9eral seconds. &n order to understand how this is done< it is sufficient to recall how 2)
one had urgently made oneself fall asleep before< or how one had fallen asleep after ha9ing been e1hausted< or after a long period of sleep depri9ation. 6 common mistake in practice occurs when people fall asleep after attempting the techni'ue< forgetting the necessary desire to 'uickly return to consciousness. S)%O.+A(Y I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S ST(AI.I.G T-) B(AI. Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Make 2 to ) s'uee>es straining the brain. This is known as straining the brain. &f nothing happens< try another techni'ue. &f 9ibrations occur during this e1ercise< try to mo9e the 9ibrations around the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain. The stronger the 9ibrations< the higher the probability that a separation techni'ue may be applied. !pontaneous separation may occur. ,hile straining the brain< a practitioner may e1perience the sounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni'ue. The 9ibrations that arise from straining the brain are 9ery striking. &f there is any doubt as to whether the 9ibrations happened< then most likely a practitioner did not e1perience them. The 9ibrations may be described as an intense< painless electrical current mo9ing through or gripping the body. 6t times< the sensation of a total numbing of the body is e1perienced. Trai$i$g To practice straining the brain< lie down< eyes closed< and attempt to strain the brain. *o not think about the fact that actually s'uee>ing the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic< rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts of it. *uring the process< a sensation of pressure or e9en real strain arises in the brain. ,ith .5E of practitioners< this strain usually occurs within the first few minutes of e1ercise. This techni'ue should be committed to 2+
memory when training so that it may be instantly recalled and practiced upon awakening from sleep. Practitioners often make the mistake of unintentionally straining their facial and neck muscles instead of straining the interior of their heads. This error should be a9oided at all costs< lest it become a habit that frustrates genuine practice. ST(AI.I.G T-) BO+Y *IT-OUT USI.G /US%1)S Te#ti$g I$dividual )ffective$e## This techni'ue in9ol9es straining the whole body and differs little from straining the brain. ,hen awakening from sleep< make one to three attempts at straining the whole body< refraining from actually fle1ing any physical muscle. &f nothing happens< try another techni'ue. Fibrations may occur as a result< and amplifying these by straining the body without using muscles can induce a spontaneous separation from the body. ,hen the 9ibrations become strong enough< attempt a separation techni'ue. !ounds often arise during the 9ibration which allow for listening in and a subse'uent entrance to the phase. Trai$i$g To practice? while lying down< eyes closed< try to strain the entire body without using physical muscles for se9eral minutes. Tingling< internal pressure< and a strain on the brain often occur during this e1ercise. Remember to a9oid straining any real muscles. &f physical strain occurs< results may be forfeited in the critical moment of fruition. 6ISUA1I9ATIO. &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< con5ure an intense desire to see and literally create a specific ob5ect. The ob5ect should be en9isioned at rest< about four to eight inches from the practitioner. Dimit the 9isuali>ation to simple< familiar ob5ects< like an apple< flower< sphere< or hand. !ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob5ect floating 5ust abo9e the eyebrows instead of directly in 25
front. &f nothing appears during this period of time< a different techni'ue should be used. &f an ob5ect appears< one should keep looking hard at it< and at a certain moment one will reali>e that one is already standing ne1t to it somewhere in the world of the phase. ,hen the ob5ect becomes realistic< one can also try to separate from one8s body on one8s own. S).SO(Y-/OTO( 6ISUA1I9ATIO. &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. &magine acti9e< physical mo9ement for 12 to 15 seconds while touching an actual ob5ect and simultaneously e1amining the imagined details of the room. &f nothing appears during this period of time< a different techni'ue should be used. &f real and imagined sensations become mi1ed< then continue the practice until the imagined sensations o9ercome the primary senses. I/AGI.)+ /O6)/).T &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or 5 to 12 seconds< concentrate on 9isuali>ing any of the following actions? wiggling< walking< running< somersaulting< pulling a rope< or swimming. Try to imagine the mo9ement as a realistic and acti9e e9ent during the practice period. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should be employed. &f results occur in the form of the sensation of mobility< the imagined mo9ement should be continued until it becomes the dominant sensation. ,hen the mo9ement achie9es primacy< it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. &f such a translocation does not automatically occur< a separation techni'ue is recommended. I/AGI.)+ S).SATIO.S &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< en9ision that a specific 2-
ob5ect is being held in the hand. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should be practiced. &f the impression of shape and weight become apparent< concentrate harder on the sensation< trying to compound the e1perience. Once the ob5ect8s presence in the hand achie9es a realistic 'uality< separation is possible. =owe9er< it is preferable to continue handling the ob5ect. 6 practitioner is free to imagine any type of ob5ect that fits in the hand. 1amples include a telephone< a drinking glass< a remote control< a ball< a pen< or a bo1. I/AGI.)+ SOU.+S 7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening one8s eyes< one should acti9ely try to hear a specific sound or word< e.g. someone8s name or a melody. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue should be changed for another one. &f sound arises< one should try to listen in to it. ,hen it peaks in 9olume< one may try to separate. )Y) /O6)/).T &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. Perform two to fi9e sharp left0right or up0down eye mo9ements. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue should be e1changed for another. &f 9ibrations occur< separation may be attempted after efforts to intensify the 9ibrations. +OT O. T-) 'O()-)A+ &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< 9isuali>e a point in the middle of the forehead. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should be used. &f 9ibrations occur< they may be intensified by using this techni'ue or by straining the brain< facilitating separation from the body. 6lso< sounds may arise that allow the practice of listening in. ')A( /)T-O+ 2(
&mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< imagine something horrific and gra9eyard0related staying nearby< something graphic< macabre< out of the worst nightmare imaginable. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should be employed. =owe9er< acute fear may occur< most likely forcing the practitioner into the phase where a separation techni'ue may be applied. 6lternati9ely< 9ibrations or noise may arise and allow the use of other indirect techni'ues. 6 common problem with the use of this techni'ue is that fear often makes the practitioner so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else than to return to wakefulness. ()%A11I.G T-) P-AS) STAT) &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< recall the sensations that accompanied a pre9ious phase e1perience. :This only works if the practitioner has achie9ed phase entrance in the past.; ither nothing will happen and a different techni'ue should be used or these sensations will be recalled and separating from the body may be tried 0 if it doesn8t occur spontaneously. Fibrations or noise may also arise during this techni'ue< in which case listening in or straining the brain may be practiced. B()AT-I.G %O.%).T(ATIO. &mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless< eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< focus on breathing@ the rise and fall of the rib cage< the inflation and deflation of the lungs< the intake and escape of air. &f no results occur< a different techni'ue should be used. &f 9ibrations< noise< or spontaneous separation occur< the practice of this techni'ue should be intensified and used to its full ad9antage. S)1)%TI.G T-) (IG-T T)%-.I2U)S
23
The ne1t step to mastering indirect techni'ues is choosing the right techni'ues that suit indi9idual predispositions. There is no point in going for one techni'ue or another only because they look interesting and because someone wrote a lot or spoke a lot about them. The choice should be based strictly upon what suits an indi9idual practitioner. Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni'ues< practically only straining the brain works easily and 'uickly for .5E of practitioners. 6ll other techni'ues work immediately for only about 25E to 52E of practitioners during initial training. =owe9er< after se9eral training sessions< each techni'ue yields results for (5E of engaged practitioners. One way or another< e9ery practitioner should identify a certain set of techni'ues that works best. 6 set should consist of no less than three techni'ues@ four or fi9e is e9en better to allow more options and practical combinations. /on0working techni'ues should not be discarded wholesale by the indi9idual because they afford an opportunity to achie9e success through new< pre9iously unresponsi9e e1periences. To ensure the correct selection of techni'ues< each should be separately practiced o9er a period of at least three days. To this end< one should e1periment with each of the primary techni'ues for 2 to 12 minutes before falling asleep< or e9en during the day. &t is good to choose at least one secondary techni'ue practice. This regimen allows a precise determination of the techni'ues that will yield the best results for the practitioner. *uring the process of selecting personali>ed techni'ues< a practitioner learns and retains the techni'ues in an intimate< personal way< which positi9ely affects how techni'ues are used during critical moments. &t is worth noting that the final selection of techni'ues should be 9aried. 4or e1ample< choosing both straining the brain and straining the body without using muscles is pointless because they are practically one and the same. More often than not< they will both either work or not work. This is why techni'ues should in9ol9e 9arious types of sensory perception? 9isual< audio< kinesthetic< 9estibular< imaginary sense perception< and internal strain. Remember that priorities and goals change with time< and 2.
that a techni'ue that fell flat during initial attempts may une1pectedly pro9e 9aluable later on. %e fle1ible. /o set of techni'ues should be car9ed in stone. &n fact< the set may change se9eral times o9er the first few weeks as the practitioner disco9ers what produces the best indi9idual results. To close this section< a list has been pro9ided< detailing the most effecti9e indirect techni'ues. This list was compiled with classroom data from the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el and may pro9e helpful in determining an effecti9e set of indirect techni'ues. The /o#t )ffective I$direct Tech$i5ue# at School of Out-ofBody Travel Semi$ar# Obser9ing &mages 15E Phantom ,iggling 15E Distening in 15E Rotation 12E !training the %rain 5E !training the %ody ,ithout 7sing Muscles 5E 4orced 4alling 6sleep 5E Mi1ture of Techni'ues 12E Other Techni'ues 22E S)PA(ATIO. T)%-.I2U)S Det us begin with a totally shocking fact? during one0third of successful indirect entries into the phase< it is not necessary to perform any specific phase entry techni'ues< as separation techni'ues are immediately successfulK This has been statistically pro9en at !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el seminars and in the analyses of other sources. "on9ersely< an incorrect understanding of separation techni'ues may lead to undesirable conse'uences. &t is possible for a practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the body. Therefore< it is 9ery important to understand how separation techni'ues work since they are often a key to success. Interesting Fact! )2
Relatively often, a practitioner $ill try to e#ploy separation techni9ues to no effect, ho$ever, he $ill later une,pectedly understand that he had "een lying in a different position than he sensed that he $as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for hi# to stand up) This happens #ostly a#ong "eginners and is indicative of an incorrect understanding of separation techni9ues) 6t times a practitioner may only need to think about separation and it happens. This is a rarity< which e1plains the e1istence of a whole series of au1iliary techni'ues. The most important separation techni'ues are rolling out< getting up< climbing out< and le9itation. (O11I.G OUT ,hile awakening< attempt to roll o9er to the edge of the bed or the wall without using any muscles. *on8t worry about falling out of bed< hitting the wall< or be concerned with the details of how this techni'ue should feel. Lust roll. G)TTI.G UP 7pon awakening< attempt to get out of bed without physical e1ertion. This should be performed in a way that is most comfortable for the practitioner. %1I/BI.G OUT ,hile awakening< try to climb out of the body without using any muscles. This techni'ue generally comes to mind when a partial separation has been achie9ed through the use of other techni'ues< or one part of the body has completely separated. 1)6ITATIO. )1
7pon awakening< attempt to le9itate upward< parallel to the bed. ,hile attempting to le9itate< do not wonder how it should be accomplished@ e9eryone intuiti9ely knows how to le9itate from their e1periences in dreams. 'A11I.G OUT Practically the same as le9itation? upon awakening< try to sink down through the bed. PU11I.G OUT =ere< upon awakening< try to e1it the body through the head< as if escaping from a lidded cocoon. BA%3*A(+S (O11 6fter awakening< try to perform a backwards somersault o9er the head without using any physical muscles. BU1G) T-) )Y)S& 7pon awakening< bulge out or widen the eyes without opening them. 4rontal mo9ement toward separation may result. !eparation techni'ues are united by a singular idea? nothing should be imagined< mo9ement should be attempted without the use of physical muscles. The techni'ues produce the same sensations of mo9ement felt in real life. &f nothing happens immediately after trying< then the techni'ue is not going to work< though it may deli9er results at a later time. 6 practitioner will instantly be able to recogni>e if the techni'ue has worked. =owe9er< people are often unprepared for the realness of the sensations and think that they are making a physical mo9ement instead of reali>ing that a part or all of the body has separated. 6fter this unfortunate failure< careful analysis helps to understand what happened and plan for a successful retry. )2
&f separation was incomplete or took place with some difficulty< this is a signal that the techni'ue is being performed correctly. !trength and aggressi9e effort are re'uired from this point to achie9e complete separation. 4or e1ample< if some mo9ement began and then stopped after ha9ing made some progress< then one should go back and mo9e e9en harder once again in the same direction. &n order to practice separation techni'ues< lie down with the eyes closed and attempt all of them o9er the course of se9eral minutes. !eparation has likely been accomplished if no muscles twitch or strain and a sensation of mo9ement occurs. There will be a strong< almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a mo9ement. /aturally< no physical mo9ement actually occurs and the practitioner remains prone and immobile@ howe9er< at the right moment< these actions will lead to an easy entrance into the phase. Interesting Fact! .ppro,i#ately 1< to =< of the ti#e that the phase is practiced, one reali1es i##ediately upon a$a%ening that one has already separated) This #eans that one #ay already go so#e$here and stand, lie do$n, sit do$n, etc) This is not ho$ever "eco#ing conscious in a drea#, "ut an actually a$a%ening) T-) B)ST TI/) TO P(A%TI%) The key to practice is the 'uantity and 'uality of attempts made that hone a practitioner8s skills. There are se9eral windows of time best suited for employing indirect techni'ues. To begin< it should be stated that sleep follows a cyclical pattern. ,e awaken e9ery hour0and0a0half and then 'uickly fall asleep again< which gi9es rise to sleep cycles. 4urthermore< we e1perience two primary stages of sleep? rapid eye mo9ement :R M; sleep< and non0rapid eye mo9ement :/R M; sleep. ))
/R M sleep includes many internal stages. The more we sleep< the less the body needs deep /R M sleep< and the more time we spend in R M sleep. Phase entrance is most likely to occur during R M sleep. The best way to implement indirect techni'ues is by the deferred #ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its final stage and then disrupt it again after falling back to sleep< which makes sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. !leep accompanied by fre'uent interruptions can be put to producti9e uses.
4or e1ample< if a practitioner :let8s call him Lack; goes to sleep at midnight< then Lack should set an alarm for - o8clock in the morning. 7pon awakening< Lack should engage in some sort of physical acti9ity< like going to the bathroom< getting a drink of water< or reading a few pages of this book. 6fterward< Lack should go back to bed thinking about how< within the ne1t two to four hours< he will wake up multiple times and make an attempt to enter the phase during each awakening. &f Lack goes to bed earlier< then his alarm clock should be set back by that amount of time< since si1 hours of initial sleep is the optimal length of time. &f Lack sleeps less than si1 hours< then the second half of his night8s sleep will be too deep. &f Lack sleeps longer than si1 hours< then there will be little time remaining for attempts< or Lack may not e9en be able to fall asleep. &f a practitioner naturally wakes up in a forceful manner< it will be difficult to regain sleep. Thus< it will not be necessary for )+
the practitioner to get out of bed with the aid of an alarm. The practitioner should attempt to go right back to sleep. /aturally< the deferred method is most applicable in cases where it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires< without ha9ing to wake up early. /ot e9eryone en5oys such lu1ury on a daily basis< but nearly e9eryone has days off when time may be set aside to practice the deferred method. +t is in large #easure due to the deferred #ethod that classroo# courses at the School of Out-of-Body Travel allo$ up to 2>= of class participants to enter the phase in the course of a single $ee%end2 The second most effecti9e window of time for entering the phase is ordinary #orning a$a%ening) This generally occurs during light slumber following a full night8s sleep. 6nother effecti9e time to practice indirect techni'ues is after awakening from a daytime nap. Once again< this type of sleep will be light and short< which pro9ides the body needed rest while allowing memory and intention to be kept intact through the moment of awakening. 6gain< not e9eryone has the lu1ury of taking daytime naps< but if such a chance arises< then it would be 9ery beneficial to take ad9antage of the opportunity. 4ightti#e a$a%enings are the least effecti9e times for phase e1perimentation because the brain still re'uires a lot of deep sleep at this time. 6wakening at night< the mind is 'uite weak and hardly capable of any effort. 9en if some results are obser9ed< awakening often ends with 'uickly falling back asleep. This is not to say that normal practice of the phase cannot occur at night@ it 5ust won8t be as effecti9e as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those who lack an opportunity to use other windows of time for practicing the phase. 7nderstand that we awaken at night e9ery .2 minutes< which is why a minimum of four awakenings is almost guaranteed when sleeping< e9en for 5ust si1 hours. ,hen the practitioner knows about this and stri9es to sei>e those moments< with time he will actually sei>e them and take ad9antage of them. %O.S%IOUS A*A3).I.G
)5
?onscious a$a%ening is waking up with a particular thought in mind@ ideally< a thought about indirect techni'ues. &n order to start using indirect techni'ues upon awakening< it is not sufficient to ha9e a cursory knowledge of the techni'ues to be used when waking. *ue to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits< it is not always easy when waking to recall any particular moti9e or idea. The goal of conscious awakening is to practice instant action without being idle after waking up. Interesting Fact! There e,ists a "elief that the pheno#enon of out-of-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is accessi"le only to an elect fe$ through practices that re9uire secret %no$ledge) 5o$ever, the greatest difficulty $hen trying to e,perience out-of-"ody travel in a short period of ti#e lies only in i##ediately re#e#"ering a"out the techni9ues upon a$a%ening $ithout #oving) This is all si#ple and straightfor$ard) But it is precisely this trifle that is the largest stu#"ling "loc% $hen trying to e,perience such an unco##on pheno#enon) This is not difficult at all for appro1imately 25E of the population. =owe9er< for the other three0'uarters of the population< this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e9en seem insurmountable. &f such thoughts arise< one should simply understand that this cannot be so< and that persistent attempts and training are the key solution. The reasons why people are unable to remember practicing the phase upon awakening are? not being in the habit of immediately doing anything upon awakening< a desire to sleep longer< a desire to go to the bathroom< being thirsty< a desire to suddenly start sol9ing day0to0day problems< and so on. )-
"onscious awakening with the intent of attempting an indirect techni'ue should be a practitioner8s primary goal< which should be pursued at e9ery cost. The speed at which the phase is learned and e1perienced depends on this. There are se9eral effecti9e tricks to learning conscious awakening? +ntention upon falling asleep/ This is the 9ery important to successfully achie9ing conscious awakening. 6 9ery clear scientific fact has been pro9en by somnologists :scientists who study sleep;? upon awakening< people usually think about what they had been thinking about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy to obser9e if the sleeper is e1perience a serious life problem@ they fall asleep with the problem and wake with it. !o< in a case like this< if difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced with a desire to practice the phase< this will produce the desired effect. &t is not necessary to think solely about conscious awakening while falling asleep. &t is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and distinctly< e9en state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of conscious actions while entering sleep will do much to promote the success of indirect techni'ues upon awakening. @eneral intent/ The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the importance and necessity of waking up and immediately remembering to practice the techni'ues< the more solid the intent will become< and the more likely the process will fulfill its role and actually lead to results. .ffir#ing desires/ !ometimes an internal intention is simply not enough for some people< or they are unable to properly affirm one by 9irtue of indi9idual characteristics. &n this case< an affirmation of desires should be introduced at the physical le9el. This could be in the form of a note with a description of a goal placed ne1t to the bed< under one8s pillow< or hung on the wall. &t could be a con9ersation with friends or family about the particular desire< or by repeatedly 9ocali>ing the actions that need to be performed upon awakening. &t could e9en be an entry in a diary< blog< or te1ting on a mobile phone. .naly1ing unsuccessful a$a%enings) 6naly>ing unsuccessful attempts at conscious awakening is e1tremely )(
important. ,hen remembering the failed attempt after se9eral minutes< se9eral hours< or e9en later in the day< focus on it and resol9e to succeed during the ne1t attempt. *eep e1ploration of the failure is highly effecti9e and practical since the practitioner is learning what works< what doesn8t work< and making healthy resolutions toward success. ?reating #otivation/ The greater the desire to enter into the phase to accomplish a goal there< the 'uicker successful conscious awakening is achie9ed. Moti9ation is be created by a great desire to do or e1perience something in the phase. &n general< pre9ious 9isits to the phase are great moti9ation< but an uninitiated person does not know it and will need something to which they can relate. 4or some< this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars< for others it could be the opportunity to see a lo9ed one who has passed away< for another it could be the chance to obtain specific information< or influence the course of a physical illness< and so forth. 6side from natural methods to achie9e conscious awaking< there are 9arious de9ices and tools that facilitate a measure of success. These will be co9ered in "hapter 5 in the section describing non0autonomous ways of entering the phase. The "est #o#ent for conscious a$a%ening is $hile e,iting a drea#) This is the #ost effective and productive ti#e to atte#pt separation or perfor#ing the techni9ues) 6t this moment< physical awareness of the body is at a minimum. 6wareness at the 9ery end of a dream often occurs after nightmares< painful e1periences in the dream< falling dreams # any dream that causes a sudden awakening. ,ith time< one should de9elop a refle1 that enables one to perform planned actions at the moment of awakening< but when consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle1 is highly beneficial to sei>ing the most fruitful of opportunities to enter the phase. *ue to 9arious psychological and physiological factors< it is not possible for e9ery person to achie9e conscious awakening after e9ery sleep cycle. Thus< there is no point in becoming upset if conscious awakening does not occur e9ery time. 1periencing only 2 to ) awakenings per day is normal@ this is sufficient )3
enough to attempt phase entrance 2 to 5 times per week when practiced daily. &t is not worth getting carried away with an e1cessi9e number of attempts. *uring the !chool8s courses< it has been noted that doing 12 conscious awakenings or more :some students try 22 or e9en )2; o9er the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that its reali>ation breaks the natural rhythms of the body< one depri9es oneself of the intermediate< transitional states that make the phase effecti9e. 6 practitioner may also 'uickly become emotionally e1hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push limits in the right direction. The upside is that one will simply tire out. &f that starts to happen< it is better to calm down and try to approach the matter in a more rela1ed manner< e9enly and gradually. A*A3).I.G *IT-OUT /O6I.G 6longside remembering the phase immediately upon waking< another important re'uirement is awakening without mo9ing< which is difficult since many people wake up and mo9e. 7pon awakening< scratching< stretching< opening the eyes< and listening to real sounds should be a9oided. 6ny real mo9ement or perception will 9ery 'uickly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality< the acti9ation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs. 6t first< awakening without mo9ing seems difficult or e9en impossible. =owe9er< it has been pro9en that this is remedied for through acti9e attempts and the desire to achie9e set goals. People often claim that they cannot awaken without mo9ing< that it8s an impossible e1perience. =owe9er< after se9eral attempts< it will happen< and it will occur more and more fre'uently with practice. Thus< if there is difficulty in awakening without mo9ement< do not despair< 5ust keep trying. !ooner or later< the body will yield to the practice< and e9erything will happen smoothly. ).
6wakening without mo9ing is 9ery important because< for the ma5ority of people< e1periments with the phase are not possible e1cept in the first waking moments where waking without mo9ing sets the stage for successful indirect techni'ue cycles. Often< a practitioner will make 12 unsuccessful attempts and mo9e while awakening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently wake calmly and gradually< success 'uickly follows. -o:ever; if a$ a:a!e$i$g i# co$#ciou#; ut :ith moveme$t; that doe# $ot mea$ that the "ractitio$er ca$$ot immediately ma!e a$ attem"t to fall i$to the "ha#e< Such attem"t#; although they :ill e a out = time# le## effective tha$ u#ual; #hould $everthele## e made A$y o""ortu$ity to "ractice :hile :a!i$g #hould $ot e :a#ted< It mu#t o$ly e !e"t i$ mi$d that o$e mu#t fir#t $eutrali>e the effect# of the moveme$t i$ order to o$ce agai$ fall i$to a$ i$termediate #tate< I$ the ca#e of moveme$t; it i# e?tremely hel"ful to egi$ "ractice :ith forced falli$g a#lee"< 1i#te$i$g i$ al#o :or!# :ell; a# doe# o #ervi$g image# a$d "ha$tom :iggli$g; each "erformed "a##ively for =-1= #eco$d#; i$#tead of the #ta$dard duratio$ of @ to = #eco$d#< After "erformi$g the#e; cycli$g may egi$< 6wakening without mo9ement< despite all its importance< is not a goal in and of itself< and also not worth suffering o9er. ,hen awakening< if there is great discomfort< something itches< a need to swallow arises< or any manner of natural refle1< it is better to deal with it and then act according to practices recommended when mo9ement upon awakening happens. /ot all mo9ements upon awakening are real and< if only for this reason alone< when mo9ement occurs< indirect techni'ues should follow. Interesting Fact! 'p to 2 < of sensations and actions that happen upon a$a%ening are not real as they see#, "ut are phanto#) 4alse sensations occur in widely di9erse ways. People often do not understand what is going on with them without +2
ha9ing e1perienced the phase. 4or e1ample< a person may think they are scratching their ear with their physical hand when they are really using a phantom hand. 6 person may hear pseudo0 sounds in the room< on the street< or at the neighbor8s without noting anything unusual. Or< a person may look around the room without knowing that their eyes are actually closed. &f a practitioner recogni>es such moments for what they are< they may immediately try to separate from the body. %Y%1)S O' I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S
+1
Thus far< indirect techni'ues used for phase entrance and techni'ues for separation in the phase ha9e been co9ered. "onscious awakening and the best times to practice it ha9e also been e1amined. /ow< a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni'ues will be presented. 4ollowing this algorithm promises 'uick and practical results. 1< Te#ti$g Se"aratio$ Tech$i5ue# :ithi$ = Seco$d# Dike the pre9ious obser9ation of separation techni'ues< a third of successful attempts with indirect techni'ues yield immediate success upon the attempt of a separation techni'ue due to the fact that the first seconds after waking up are the most useful for entering the phase. The less time that has elapsed after awakening< the better. "on9ersely< if one lies down e1pecting something to happen< chances 'uickly dissipate. Thus< upon awakening< preferably without first mo9ing< a practitioner should immediately try 9arious separation techni'ues< like rolling out< getting up< or le9itation. &f a techni'ue suddenly started to yield results for appro1imately for 5 seconds< then separation from the body should be attempted. !ometimes inertia< difficulty< or a barrier will arise during a separation attempt. /o attention should be gi9en to these problems. &nstead< resol9e to separate 0 decidedly and aggressi9ely climb out of the body. Heep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon awakening is a skill of the utmost importance@ one that is worth honing from the 9ery beginning< ne9er forgotten. 2< The %ycle of I$direct Tech$i5ue# to U#e if O$e i# U$a le to Se"arate &f separation does not occur after se9eral seconds< it most likely means that separation will not occur< regardless of elapsed time in effort. This is where the practitioner must resort to other techni'ues. The practitioner should already ha9e chosen a minimum of three primary or secondary techni'ues that suit a practical repertoire. =ere is where the techni'ues are put into action. +2
4ota Bene2 +n order to give a specific e,a#ple, $e $ill e,a#ine the use of three specific techni9ues, $hich should "e replaced $ith a tested and chosen set of techni9ues) The following operational techni'ues ha9e been used as e1amples? obser9ing images :a;< phantom wiggling :b;< and listening in :c;. 6fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating< the practitioner immediately starts obser9ing the 9oid behind the eyes. &f images begin to appear within ) to 5 seconds< obser9ation should continue without scrutini>ing the images in detail< or the image will e9aporate. 6s a result of this action< the image will 'uickly become more and more realistic and colorful< engulfing the practitioner. &f e9erything comes together correctly< a sudden translocation into the picture will occur< or< when the picture becomes 9ery realistic< attempt to separate from the body. &f nothing happens after ) to 5 seconds< then the practitioner should transition to the techni'ue of phantom wiggling. 4or ) to 5 seconds< the practitioner 'uickly searches the entire body for a part that can be wiggled. Or< the entire period of time is spent in an attempt to wiggle a specific body part? a finger< hand< or leg. &f the desired effect occurs< then the practitioner should continue with the techni'ue and achie9e the ma1imum possible range of mo9ement. *uring this process< a number of things can happen< including spontaneous separation< a successful separation attempt< free mo9ement of the wiggled part< or the presence of sound or 9ibrations. 6ll of these e9ents are of great ad9antage. &f nothing wiggles o9er the course of ) to 5 seconds< then the practitioner should mo9e on to listening in. The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. &f the sound is there< listen and try to amplify it. 6s a result< the noise may grow into a roar and spontaneous separation will occur< separating through the use of a techni'ue will be possible< or 9ibrations will occur. &f no noise occurs o9er the course of ) to 5 seconds< then the entire cycle should be repeated. &t is beneficial to e1amine the reason behind the use of a set of three indirect techni'ues. This is moti9ated by the fact that the body often reacts to techni'ues in 9ery peculiar ways. ,ith one person< a techni'ue may work one day and not work on another day< which is why if only one techni'ue is used< e9en a +)
9ery good techni'ue that works often< a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different e1perience through the lack of 9ariety in practice. Thus< a practical repertoire should consist of se9eral techni'ues. Interesting Fact! So#eti#es, the first techni9ue that $or%s for a practitioner never results in a repeat of phase entrance again, although other techni9ues that $ere not i##ediately effective at the novice stages of practice later "egin to $or% regularly and successfully) @< (e"eati$g the %ycle of I$direct Tech$i5ue# &f the first cycle of ) techni'ues does not yield any clear results< this does not mean that all is lost. 9en if the techni'ues do not work< they still draw the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is simply necessary to continue using the techni'ues by again obser9ing pictures< phantom wiggling< and listening in # and repeating this process at least three times. =a9ing performed one cycle of techni'ues< one can easily go on to doing a second cycle< a third one< a fourth one< and so on. &t is 'uite probable that during one of these cycles< a techni'ue will suddenly pro9e itself< e9en though it had not been working at all 5ust a few seconds beforehand. 6 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of + cycles. The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do something that has shown itself not to work< and one may gi9e up taking further action< e9en though one could be at the cusp of falling into the phase. Heep trying< and then try again< and againM There ha9e been cases where it took twenty cycles to produce results. 6 monumental effort< yes< but one worth the outcome. A< 'alli$g A#lee" :ith the Po##i ility of Tryi$g Agai$< ++
&f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing cycles and attempts to separate< or e9en if e9erything worked out< it is still better to go back to sleep to facilitate subse'uent attempts. 6gain< it is 9ery important to go to sleep with a clearly defined intention of actually performing the cycles upon awakening. !uch intention 9astly increases the probability that the ne1t attempt will occur soon. That is< one should not fall asleep with an empty head and the desire to simply get a good night8s sleep. &f using the deferred method< then clear intention is mandatory< as se9eral attempts are possible o9er the course of a sleep cycle. 9en if only a few attempts are made accompanied by decided and concentrated effort< then the four steps described in the algorithm will undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase. &n order to more effecti9ely use the system of indirect cycles< it is necessary to discuss what to do if one techni'ue works and progress ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur. 4irst< understand that if a techni'ue has begun to work< only lack of e1perience and skill will pre9ent the phase. !econd< barriers are o9ercome by temporarily switching to other techni'ues. Det us suppose that noise arising when listening in grows louder and louder and then peaks in 9olume. &t would surely be beneficial to switch to forced falling asleep or obser9ing images for se9eral seconds< and then return to listening in. The sound may then become much louder and pro9ide an opportunity to proceed with the techni'ue. !ometimes< it makes sense to break off se9eral times into 9arious techni'ues and then return to the primary techni'ue that yielded some results.
+5
&t is often possible to simultaneously perform two or e9en three techni'ues and e1perience no negati9e effect to results. &t is also normal and natural to skip around from techni'ue to techni'ue< de9iating from a specific plan of action. 4or e1ample< sounds often arise during phantom wiggling. &n this case< a practitioner may 5ust simply switch o9er to listening in. Other oft0 encountered results pairings are? images from sound< sound from rotation< sound from straining the brain< a strain on the brain from listening in< 9ibrations from rotation< 9ibrations from phantom wiggling< and so forth. 8uring initial atte#pts at using cycles of indirect techni9ues, the pro"le# of confusion during a critical #o#ent #ay arise, $hen a novice practitioner suddenly forgets e,actly $hat to do and ho$ to do it) This is nor#al, and the solution is to i##ediately do $hatever co#es to #ind) Results can "e achieved in this #anner) :hen a practitioner is #ore rela,ed a"out the practice, such pro"le#s $ill no longer occur) -I.TS '(O/ T-) /I.+ Faried cycles of indirect techni'ues is an almost mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some +-
e1ceptions. !ometimes< through indirect indicators< a practitioner may be inclined to begin with certain techni'ues< regardless of what had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use such cues plays an e1tremely important role in the use of indirect techni'ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase the effecti9eness of practice. -i$t .o< 1& Image# &f the practitioner becomes aware upon awakening that some images< pictures< or remnants from dreams are before him< then he should immediately proceed to the techni'ue of obser9ing images< with all of the results that arise from it. &f this does not lead to anything< then cycling with a set of techni'ues should begin. -i$t .o< 2& .oi#e# &f the practitioner reali>es upon awakening that he hears an internal noise< roaring< ringing< whistling< and so forth< then he should immediately begin from the techni'ue of listening in. &f this has no effect< then cycles of indirect techni'ues ought to commence. -i$t .o< @& 6i ratio$# &f a practitioner feels 9ibrations throughout the body while awakening< they should be amplified through the use of straining the brain or straining the body without using muscles. ,hen the 9ibrations reach their peak< the practitioner can try to separate. &f nothing happens after se9eral attempts< indirect techni'ue cycles should start. -i$t .o< A& .um $e## &f a practitioner wakes to numbness in a body part< phantom wiggling of that part should be attempted. &f no result is achie9ed after se9eral attempts< cycling should be tried. Of course< it is better to refrain from techni'ues if the numbness is 9ery intense and causes substantial discomfort. AGG()SSIO. A.+ PASSI6ITY +(
*uring the practice of indirect techni'ues< including techni'ue cycles< unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or becoming completely awake. These results indicate a deficiency or e1cess of aggression. &f a practitioner usually falls asleep while attempting to enter the phase< then more aggressi9e action is needed while performing indirect techni'ues. &f< on the other hand< most attempts end in a full and alert awakening< then aggression should be curbed and techni'ues should be conducted more slowly and in a more rela1ed manner. %alance between passi9ity and aggression is imperati9e@ the phase state is easily attained by those practitioners who find a stable medium between passi9ity and aggression. The issue of aggression re'uires a closer e1amination. Auite often, atte#pts at indirect techni9ues are #ade leisurely, $ithout desire or real effort, to &chec% the# off the list*) Results #ore easily reali1ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the phase) More often than not, practitioners lac% aggressive desire, instead of having too #uch of it) Thus, each effort re9uires a distinct $ant to succeed) ST(AT)GY 'O( A%TIO. !ome mistakenly belie9e that indirect techni'ues will produce 'uick< easy results< like a pill. *espite the fact that the techni'ues described in this guidebook are the best means to entering the phase< strong effort still needs to be e1erted. This is not important for some< as e9erything comes 'uite easily to them< but for others this is of great importance. &ndirect techni'ues will definitely work if practiced consistently and as described. &t has already been noted that in the ma5ority of cases< making se9eral concentrated attempts upon awakening without mo9ement is sufficient enough to produce results. &t may take a lot of time and effort to achie9e phase entrance< so practitioners who set goals and work diligently will be presented with a crown of success. +3
6ttempts are important in large measure not only for the final result< but also for the process itself. *uring practice< the practitioner independently learns and sol9es issues that may not ha9e been understood in the guidebook. Other times< the practitioner will encounter situations that ha9e ne9er been described at all. &t8s impossible to prepare a student for e9ery possible scenario< so as a practitioner mo9es deeper into practice< a uni'ue< indi9idual perspecti9e and portfolio of e1periences de9elops< which will certainly pro9e useful in the future. 7ntil then< diligent practice of the information presented in this book will ready a practitioner for that personal frontier. 6ctions in practice re'uire strict attention. !tudy the techni'ues and selects those that work best. !et the goal of consistent< conscious waking without mo9ement. Make an ob5ecti9e of performing cycles of indirect techni'ues while waking up< day in and day out. :ith such a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus his attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li%e, for e,a#ple, on direct techni9ues for entering the phase) &f the indirect techni'ues do not work in the course of se9eral days< continue trying. The latest results occur in a matter of weeks< not months or years< like some sources maintain. $oals are meant to be stubbornly pursued< step0by0step< firmly< and diligently. &f no results occur after 12 to 22 days< it is better to cease practice for a week and take a rest< and then return with a fresh resol9e to master the practice. &nterestingly enough< it is e1actly during such a break that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most di9erse methods occur. &f success is still elusi9e e9en after 1 to 2 months of trying< then a thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any ob9ious mistakes or deficiencies. &f o9ercoming them pro9es difficult or impossible< switching o9er to direct techni'ues is not recommended since they pro9e much more difficult than indirect techni'ues. &nstead< techni'ues for entering the phase through conscious dreaming should be practiced. &t is also not worth skipping o9er problematic areas and trying to make up for mistakes by e1pending e9en more effort. 4or e1ample< ignoring the precondition of awakening without +.
mo9ing will pro9e fruitless. %ypassing this re'uirement works for 9ery few people. 4acing e9ery problem head0on and working hard to break through will be richly rewarded with an unforgettable< treasured e1periences. Heep tryingM TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S &nternal certainty that nothing will happen instead of belie9ing in positi9e results. !topping the performance of techni'ues after an unsuccessful cycle when a minimum of four cycles should be practiced. "onstantly awakening to mo9ement instead of remaining still. Performing direct techni'ues in the e9ening. Total concentration on indirect techni'ues is re'uired from the morning on if a practitioner8s goal is access to the phase. Performing indirect techni'ues for an e1tremely long period of time :2 minutes or more;. This is a complete waste of time in most cases. !witching from techni'ues that ha9e begun to work when practice should be followed through to the end. Passi9ely performing techni'ues instead of being determined and aggressi9e. Performing each techni'ue separately for too long a period of time< e9en if the techni'ue does not work< instead of switching to another techni'ue within se9eral seconds. 1cessi9e thinking and analysis while performing indirect techni'ues< which re'uire mental tran'uility and inner stillness. !topping and concentrating on unusual sensations when they arise 9ersus continuing the techni'ue that brought them about in the first place. 1tremely long anticipation upon awakening instead of immediately performing techni'ues. Premature attempts at separating< instead of performing phase creation techni'ues through to the end of progress. =olding the breath when unusual sensations appear. %e calm instead. 52
Opening the eyes when the only recommended mo9ement is breathing or mo9ing the eyes behind closed lids. %eing agitated instead of rela1ed. "easing attempts to separate e9en when partial success is met. !training the physical muscles while performing the techni'ues 9ersus remaining physically motionless. /ot practicing after an alert awakening< when techni'ues are best applied 0 especially in the e9ent of waking without mo9ement. Merely imagining the techni'ues instead of really understanding them and performing them< if< of course< one is not performing rotation or other imagined techni'ues. !imply wiggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi1ed determination to increase the range of mo9ement 4alling right asleep during forced falling asleep< instead of ha9ing the firm intention of continuing efforts within only 5 to 12 seconds. !crutini>ing the details of images when using the techni'ue of obser9ing images@ the whole image should be obser9ed panoramically lest it disappear. &ntentionally trying to force pictures when obser9ing images< instead of looking for what is naturally presented. !imply hearing noise when employing the techni'ue of listening in< instead of attenti9ely trying to pay attention< catch something< and listen in. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( 2 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hy are indirect techni'ues the easiestJ 2. ,hy will one techni'ue work for some people and not for othersJ ). =ow many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phaseJ +. ,hen obser9ing images< should a picture be con5uredJ
51
5. =ow is phantom wiggling different from imagined mo9ementJ -. ,here does sound come from while listening inJ (. =ow is forced listening in different from normal listening inJ 3. ,hen employing the techni'ue of rotation< should one try to rotate or simply imagine the rotationJ .. ,hat is physically strained when using the techni'ue of straining the brainJ 12. =ow is straining the brain different from straining the body without using musclesJ 11. !hould a practitioner fall asleep when using the forced falling asleep techni'ueJ 12. 6ccording to statistics from classes held at the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el< which indirect techni'ues are the most effecti9eJ 1). ,hy should one practice all of the primary techni'ues in a rela1ed stateJ 1+. ,hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one0third of the time while using indirect techni'uesJ 15. &s le9itation the most popular separation techni'ueJ 1-. ,hat is the essential difference between indirect techni'ues and separation techni'uesJ 1(. =ow does the separation techni'ue of rolling out differ from the indirect techni'ue of rotationJ 13. &s it necessary to imagine anything while trying to separateJ 1.. ,hen is the best time to use indirect techni'uesJ 22. "an techni'ues that are traditionally used upon awakening be attempted during the dayJ =ow effecti9e are these techni'ues during the dayJ 21. &s becoming consciousness while dreaming the same as conscious awakeningJ 22. ,hen employing indirect techni'ues< does an inability to awaken without mo9ing ha9e an effect on oneCs practiceJ 2). ,hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect techni'uesJ 52
2+. ,hat first step must be taken while cycling through indirect techni'uesJ 25. =ow many different techni'ues should a cycle consist ofJ 2-. ,hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be practicedJ 2(. &f a lot of time has passed after awakening< is this good or bad for cycles of indirect techni'uesJ 23. ,hat must be done if a techni'ue gets stuck at an unsatisfactory le9el of resultsJ 2.. &f the cycles do not work< what should be doneJ )2. ,hat are hints from the mindJ )1. &n what cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi9e effort when performing indirect techni'uesJ Ta#!# 1. Try all of the primary indirect techni'ues while in a rela1ed state and single out ) to 5 techni'ues that seem to work. Repeat such training another couple of times on other days. 2. Try all of the separation techni'ues in a rela1ed state. ). 6chie9e one conscious awakening followed by cycles of indirect techni'ues. +. 6chie9e one conscious awakening without any physical mo9ement and attempt an indirect techni'ue. 5. 7pon awakening without mo9ing< perform a full cycle of indirect techni'ues< and repeat this e1ercise until phase entrance is achie9ed.
5)
%ha"ter @ , +irect Tech$i5ue#

T-) %O.%)PT O' +I()%T T)%-.I2U)S 8irect techni9ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e,perience are used $ithout the prere9uisite of sleepB "y perfor#ing specific actions $hile lying do$n $ith the eyes closed) The ad9antage of direct techni'ues is that< in theory< they can be performed at any moment. =owe9er< a large drawback e1ists in the length of time it takes to master the techni'ues. Only 52E of practitioners achie9e success after making daily attempts o9er a period of ) to - weeks. 4or some< an entire year may pass before results are reali>ed. The difficulty in achie9ing results with direct techni'ues is not a problem of inaccessibility< but the natural psychological characteristics of the indi9idual. /ot e9eryone is able to clearly understand the specific nuances in9ol9ed< which is why some will continually make mistakes. Many practitioners stri9e to master direct techni'ues right away because they appear to be the most con9enient< straightforward< and concrete techni'ues. =owe9er< it is a gra9e mistake to begin attempting and mastering phase entrance from this le9el. &n .2E of cases where no9ices begin their training with direct techni'ues< failure is guaranteed. Moreo9er< a 9ast amount of time< effort< and emotion will be wasted. 6s a result< complete disillusionment with the entire sub5ect of phase e1periences is possible. 8irect techni9ues should only "e practiced after #astery of the easiest indirect techni9ues or ho$ to "eco#e conscious $hen drea#ing) +n any case, difficulties $ill not $ear one do$n after$ards, as it $ill "e e,ceedingly clear fro# one-s o$n e,perience that the phase is not a fig#ent of the i#agination) .lso, an advanced %no$ledge of indirect techni9ues $ill #a%e it considera"ly easier to achieve direct entry into the phase) 5+
Nuality of the phase e1perience is not dependent upon the chosen entrance techni'ue. *irect techni'ues do not necessarily pro9ide a deeper< more lasting phase o9er indirect techni'ues. *irect techni'ues are better suited for some practitioners and not others< but this ban only be said for a minority of the practicing population. Meanwhile< indirect techni'ues are accessible to absolutely e9eryone all of the time. &f a practitioner has decides to begin practice with direct techni'ues or has gained the necessary e1perience with indirect techni'ues< the underlying principles of the techni'ues must still be learned. ,ithout these< nothing will occur< e1cept coincidentally and in rare cases. The key to the successful use of direct techni'ues rests in achie9ing a free0floating state of consciousness. =owe9er< we will first e1amine a large 9ariety of 9ery useful aspects and factors that make direct entry into the phase much easier. 4irst< we will e1amine when it is best to perform the techni'ues and how intensi9ely to e1ercise their practice. Then< we will e1amine the 9ery important factor of body position< and the no less crucial issue of how long the techni'ues should be performed. Then< we will briefly in9estigate the issue of rela1ation< and then we will immediately mo9e on to the actual direct techni'ues. Only after co9ering all of the abo9e are we able to del9e into the issue of what a free0floating state of consciousness is and how to achie9e it. T-) B)ST TI/) TO P(A%TI%) The issue of time is not important with indirect techni'ues since the ma5or prere'uisite is that they are performed immediately after awakening occurs. &n the case of direct techni'ues< the issue of timing is much more critical. /aturally< the best method for finding the right time to perform direct techni'ues is the same as indirect techni'ues # the deferred #ethod. =owe9er< there are some serious differences here. 4irst of all< one may interrupt one8s sleep at practically anytime of the night or early morning. !econd< after ha9ing 55
woken up :5015 min.;< one should not fall back asleep< but should immediately proceed to the techni'ues. *irect techni'ues are many times more effecti9e with the deferred method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that with the deferred method< the mind does not ha9e time to become 122E alert< and it is easy to fall into the altered state of consciousness that will allow results. ,hen it comes to specific steps< one should awaken in the middle of the night either on oneCs own or with the help of an alarm clock. Then< one should get up and do something for ) to 12 minutes< and then lie down again in bed and perform the techni'ues. &f it is probable that the practitioner will wake up in too alert a state< and thus not e9en be sleepy< then the inter9al between awakening and performing the direct techni'ue should be shortened< and fewer things should be done during that period of time. &t should be noted that with this setup< a free0floating state of mind plays a far lesser role that with other procedures. The second most effecti9e window of time is "efore falling asleep at night< when the practitioner goes to bed. *uring this period of time< the brain needs to shut down the body and mind in order to renew its strength< which has been e1pended o9er the course of the day. This natural process can be taken ad9antage of by introducing certain ad5ustments to it. 6ttempts at performing direct techni'ues during the day are less effecti9e. =owe9er< if fatigue has already had a chance to build up by this time< this can be taken ad9antage of because the body will try to fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those who are accustomed to napping during the day. $enerally< other windows of time produce a substantially worse result< which is why one should start with performing direct techni'ues in the middle of the night< or before a nightCs sleep. Only after such techni'ues ha9e been mastered will it be possible to e1periment with daytime attempts. I.T).SITY O' ATT)/PTS The degree of enthusiasm that is de9oted to any pursuit is directly related to successfully reaching a goal. =owe9er< it is 5-
9ery important to know when to ease up< especially with the delicate matter of phase entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni'ue is sufficient. &f more attempts are made< the 'uality of each attempt will suffer considerably. Interesting Fact! Many approach direct techni9ues as if digging a ditch/ the #ore - the faster and the "etter) The result/ do1ens of atte#pts that yield no fruit) 6 lot of practitioners belie9e that do>ens of attempts o9er the course of a day will yield the phase. This is not the path to success and will 'uickly lead to disillusionment with the practice. 9en if after a week or a month no results are seen< direct techni'ues should be attempted only once daily. Persistent< analytical< and sensible< stubborn resol9e to practice properly will produce the desired effect. +U(ATIO. O' A. ATT)/PT &t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct techni'ue by lying in bed and resol9ing neither to sleep nor get up until the phase occurs. !uch coarseness in handling delicate nature of the mind will produce nothing besides rapid emotional e1haustion. Rigid timeframes apply while performing direct techni'ues before a sleep or in the middle of the night. *irect techni'ues attempts should only last 12 to 22 minutes. Donger durations inhibit sleepiness because the mind will concentrate too long on the techni'ues< and the desire to fall asleep will dissipate< resulting in insomnia that often lasts se9eral hours. O9erdone efforts negati9ely affect natural enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the following day< which is compounded by the reality of a growing number of failed attempts. &f direct techni'ues produce no effect o9er the course of 12 to 22 minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night< then it is better to go to sleep with the thought that e9erything will work 5(
out another time. This is the positi9e outlook a practitioner ought to always maintain. BO+Y POSITIO. ,ith indirect techni'ues body position isn8t important since conscious awakening regardless of body position is the goal. =owe9er< the position of the body is crucial while practicing direct techni'ues. There is not an e1act body position that each practitioner should assume since< once again< indi9idual characteristics and instincts differ widely. There are specific rules that allow one to select the right position< based on indirect indicators. Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse # lying on the back without a pillow< legs and arms straightened. This notion has probably been borrowed from other practices claiming that it helps achie9e an altered state of mind. =owe9er< this position seriously impairs the efforts of the ma5ority of practitioners. The corpse pose should only be used when it is probable that a practitioner will 'uickly fall asleep while performing techni'ues in this pose< e9en though it generally pre9ents sleep. &f a practitioner e1periences difficulty falling asleep and is constantly awake while performing direct techni'ues< then the most comfortable position for the indi9idual should be used. +f sleep co#es 9uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural position should "e ta%en) +f a practitioner e,periences fe$er gaps in consciousness $hen the techni9ues are perfor#ed and has a harder ti#e falling asleep, a #ore co#forta"le a position should "e used) *epending on the situation< there are many possible positions? lying down on the back< on the stomach< on the side< or e9en in a half0reclined position. &t is possible that a practitioner will ha9e to change positions from one attempt to another< introducing ad5ustments related to a free0floating state of mind. ()1A4ATIO.
53
%y nature< one should clearly understand that direct techni'ues are in and of themsel9es rela1ation methods< inasmuch as no phase can occur without one being rela1ed. 6ccordingly< one can go immediately into the phase without any prior rela1ation. !ince the most effecti9e window of time for using direct techni'ues occurs before sleep and at night< and lasts only 12 to 22 minutes in any case< additional time should not be wasted on trying to rela1< nor should time for rela1ation be subtracted from the re'uisite 12 to 22 minutes. "orrect and 'uality rela1ation is a difficult pursuit and many go about it indi9idually< producing an opposition to natural rela1ation. 4or e1ample< many endea9or to rela1 their bodies to such a degree that in the end the mind is as acti9e as it would be while trying to sol9e a difficult mathematical e'uation. &n this type of situation< entering the phase is impossible. The body automatically rela1es when the mind is rela1ed. The body< in turn< will ne9er rela1 if the mind is acti9e. Therefore< it is better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of rela1ation and sa9e their energies for more elementary matters. &nstead of forcing a technical rela1ation< a practitioner should simply lie down for se9eral minutes and this will pro9ide the best rela1ation. Dying down acti9ates natural rela1ation processes@ the most powerful kind. "omplete< peaceful rela1ation may only be coerced by those with speciali>ed< in0depth e1perience. $enerally< these are people who ha9e spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and meditati9e states. Rela1ation in these cases should take no more than 1 to ) minutes and no longer as because when a practitioner is e1pert at rela1ation it is sufficient to 5ust think about it< and it occurs. 6ll 'uality rela1ation techni'ues may well ser9e as direct techni'ues< if a free0floating state of mind occurs while they are e1ercised. 6fter gaining the necessary e1perience with trance and meditation< a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to mastering the phase. 5.
6A(IATIO.S O' USI.G +I()%T T)%-.I2U)S Techni'ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e1actly the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference is in the method of implementation. The techni'ues are described in detail in "hapter 2. =owe9er< since direct techni'ues mostly re'uire passi9ity< not all techni'ues work e'ually well for both direct and indirect entries into the phase. 4or e1ample< acti9e techni'ues like straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the phase. *irect techni'ues differ from indirect techni'ues in their implementation because of the slow< halting production of results that occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. &f upon awakening something happens to work< then this can practically always lead to entrance into the phase. 4or e1ample< the same phantom wiggling before sleep can begin 'uickly enough< but range of mo9ement will not be easy to increase< and the entire implementation of the techni'ue will rely on protracted< rhythmic mo9ement. Results take much longer? ten minutes instead of ten seconds. These differences also apply to e9ery techni'ue described in this guidebook. Dike the practice of indirect techni'ues< to begin the practice of direct techni'ues< a practitioner should choose ) or + of the most suitable techni'ues from those that pro9e most effecti9e to the indi9idual. &n order to assist the practitioner< a table has been pro9ided< detailing the documented effecti9eness of the direct techni'ues? The /o#t )ffective +irect Tech$i5ue# at Semi$ar# of the School of Out-of-Body Travel Phantom ,iggling 15E Rotation 15E Distening in 15E Fibrations :occurring amid the use of other 15E techni'ues; Obser9ing &mages 12E Mi1ture of Techni'ues 12E !imple separation :usually mi1ed in with other 12E -2 techni'ues; Other Techni'ues 12E
The primary difference in working with direct techni'ues is the time that it takes to e1ercise each. &f testing a specific indirect techni'ue takes only ) to 5 seconds< then in this case se9eral minutes will be spent. *uration 9aries depending on certain factors. There are three primary ways of performing the techni'ues? classical< se'uencing< and cycling 0 similar to the cycling used with indirect techni'ues. To understand which 9ariant should be used< consider the following table? 6ariatio$# of U#i$g the *he$ to U#e It Tech$i5ue# ?lassical Cpassive0 variation/ 0 when learning direct One attempt of 1 techni'ue. techni'ues@ The techni'ue may be alternated 0 when a practitioner generally after each attempt. sleeps poorly@ 0 if attempts lead to waking up@ 0 if attempts with other 9ariations occur without lapses in consciousness@ 0 if the body and consciousness are in a rela1ed state@ Se9uencing C#iddle0/ 0 used if falling asleep occurs One attempt with 2 to ) while using the classical 9ariation< techni'ues for 1 to 5 minutes. or if cycling results in becoming Techni'ues are alternated wide awake@ infre'uently. 6ggression 0 when a practitioner generally fluctuates with the length of time falls asleep 'uickly@ that the techni'ues are performed. ?ycling Cactive0/ 0 if the classical and se'uencing 6lgorithm of cycling ) 9ariations put one asleep@ techni'ues like with indirect 0 when one generally falls entry to the phase< but asleep 9ery 'uickly@ performing each techni'ue for 12 0 can also be employed when seconds to 1 minute< and not ) to e1hausted or sleep depri9ed@ 5 seconds. -1
6 practitioner should always begin with the classical 9ariation< i.e. using one techni'ue o9er an entire attempt. *ue to the unusual nature of the efforts in9ol9ed< a beginner8s enthusiasm may sustain a completely alert state. Dater< howe9er< strong< prolonged lapses of consciousness into sleep may occur. =ere< it may be necessary to increase the le9el of acti9ity by transitioning to the se'uencing 9ariation. !e'uencing is the primary 9ariation used for direct techni'ues because of its elasticity in application. &t can be passi9e if o9er the course of 15 minutes when a practitioner alternates two techni'ues for fi9e minutes. &t may also be aggressi9e if used se'uencing three techni'ues for one minute. 9erything between these two e1tremes allows proper practice of the techni'ues and selection of the best 9ariation to achie9e a free0floating state of mind. &f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e9en with the acti9e form of se'uencing< then one should start cycling through indirect techni'ues< but performing each techni'ue from 12 seconds to 1 minute. 6s long work with the techni'ues is implied< one should not torment oneself if one does not want to do something< otherwise one may 'uickly tire out. 9erything should be a pleasure to do and not cause any e1cessi9e emotional tension. T-) '())-'1OATI.G STAT) O' /I.+ There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni'ues offered in literature< stories< on the &nternet< and at seminars. !ometimes< one description fundamentally differs from another. &n the ma5ority of cases< howe9er< common threads e1ist that unite almost e9ery description of a particular techni'ue? short lapses in consciousness< memory gaps< and drifting in and out of sleep< all of which are hallmarks of the free0floating state of mind. 6fter any of these phenomena occur< all manner of unusual pre0 phase or phase sensations arise. Dapses in consciousness may last for seconds< se9eral minutes< or more than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of consciousness to entrance into a full0fledged dream. They -2
may be singular and rare< or may occur se9eral times o9er the course of a minute. ,hate9er a lapse entails< the mind attains a mode of operating that is ideal for phase e1perimentation< pro9ided the practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 'uickly return to a conscious< waking state. /ot e9ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse must ha9e sufficient depth to be effecti9e. Thus< with e9ery unsuccessful lapse< another deeper lapse should be incurred. The primary practical drawback of the free0floating state of mind is the possibility of falling completely asleep during lapses instead of only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni'ues are definitely necessary to ensure the desired result. !uch techni'ues more or less fulfill an au1iliary function< and thus one need not be strict about them. I$tere#ti$g 'actB +t does not #atter $hich direct techni9ue is usedB as long as it leads to lapses in consciousness, success is possi"le)
,hen performing the 9ariations of the techni'ues< a practitioner can begin to 9acillate between full alertness and complete asleep< coming to< and then nodding off again. -)
To a9oid falling asleep re'uires a strong desire to return to wakefulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol9e on the part of the practitioner< e9en if< while performing a direct techni'ue< drifting in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly assert that at the moment consciousness tapers off< awakening will immediately occur. On the other hand< if lapses do not occur< and are replaced by complete alertness< the following tricks of the trade may help? full concentration on mental actions or< con9ersely< musing and daydreaming in parallel with the techni'ue being used. &t should be noted that these are only effecti9e at the initial stages of working with direct techni'ues since such techni'ues ha9e a strong sleep0inducing effect. &f direct techni'ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses after a long period of regular practice< then it must be assumed that the practitioner is dealing with some appreciable error in techni'ue or in the length of performance. Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by body position during practice or by changing the 9ariation used while performing techni'ues. ntering the phase with a free0floating state of mind most often occurs as the result of three key factors. 4irst< one techni'ue or another may begin to work well during a lapse. !econd< nearness to the phase may une1pectedly manifest itself through sounds or 9ibration after a lapse. *uring this< transitioning to techni'ues that correspond to the abo9e symptoms :listening in< straining the brain; may be applied. Third< when e1iting a lapse< it is sometimes easy to separate or 'uickly find a working techni'ue by paying attention to initial indicators. Dapses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 122E of cases. =owe9er< stri9ing to achie9e lapses plays a 9ery important role since they are not always percei9able< and a lapse occurrence is not always ob9ious. They can be 9ery short in duration or shallow. Or< they may not occur at all. /onetheless< properly applied techni'ues to produce lapses may gi9e entrance to the phase. AU4I1IA(Y 'A%TO(S -+
7sing direct techni'ues in the e9ening or in the middle of the night take ad9antage of the body8s natural state of fatigue and for practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. 4or e1ample< direct techni'ues more easily lead to success if the practitioner is considerably sleep0depri9ed. Moreo9er< in such a state< inducing a free0floating state of mind may be forgone. The most important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately< in addition to employing the appropriate 9ariations with the techni'ues. ,illful depri9ation of sleep is torturous and useless e9en though great results may be achie9ed by an e1perienced and knowledgeable practitioner in a se9erely fatigued state. %eginners are better off approaching all forms of practice in a natural< balanced way. 6n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep depri9ation@ physical and emotional fatigues also play important roles. &n that case< the most important thing is not to fall asleep when performing the techni'ues< and thus one must select a more acti9e techni'ue 9ariation than usual. ST(AT)GY 'O( A%TIO. *irect techni'ues seldom produce 'uick and clear results< unlike entering the phase 9ia becoming conscious while dreaming or through the use of indirect techni'ues. 6t first< direct techni'ues produce sporadic results< which is why the path of practice should not begin with direct techni'ues hoping for fast results. &t is better to systematically practice a techni'ue< working toward mastery on a consistent basis. There is no cause for worry if results are achie9ed after a month of daily attempts. 6 continual effort to analy>e practice and impro9e should be the primary focus because failures are always caused by distinguishable mistakes. 6lthough difficulties may arise with direct techni'ues< one should ne9er abandon what worked until then :i.e. indirect techni'ues;< as this could temporarily depri9e one of the e1perience that one has gained so far. -5
6 combination of direct and indirect techni'ues should ne9er be used during the course of a single day since this would be detrimental to practical focus and enthusiasm. &t is better to separately perform each type of techni'ue on different days. 4or e1ample< direct techni'ues could be used before falling asleep during the workweek while indirect techni'ues may be practiced during the weekends when a practitioner has more chances to e1periment using the e1tra opportunities to sleep. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- +I()%T T)%-.I2U)S 6ssuming an incorrect position when lying down. Performing direct techni'ues during the day when a practitioner is ine1perienced< instead of in the e9ening or at night@ Performing more than one attempt per day. Performing protracted rela1ation before the techni'ues< e9en when this may play a negati9e role. Performing the techni'ues for too long when they should be e1ercised for no more than 22 minutes. 4orgetting to affirm a strong intention of awakening during a lapse of consciousness. Dack of a free0floating state of mind. This is mandatory 4alling asleep during lapses in a free0floating state of mind< instead of working toward multiple lapses while awakening. 4orgetting separation techni'ues and awaiting some unknown e9ent upon emergence from a lapse< instead of taking ad9antage of the moment. 1cessi9ely alternating the techni'ues in a primary repertoire< instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner. =olding the breath when unusual sensations are encountered. 6lways be calm. =alting practice when unusual sensations occur when it is necessary to continue what brought about the sensations. 1cessi9e e1citement while performing direct techni'ues. Dack of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep depri9ation. --
Dack of a clear plan of action. 7nderstanding and planning the use of distinct 9ariations of the techni'ues beforehand is crucial to the analysis of subse'uent errors in practice. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( @ 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hich techni'ues should be mastered before proceeding to direct techni'uesJ 2. !hould results from the use of direct techni'ues be e1pected after se9eral days or a weekJ ). &s it better to practice direct techni'ues during the day or in the e9eningJ +. &s it correct to perform three direct attempts per dayJ 5. ,hich body position should be assumed when suffering from insomniaJ -. ,hich body position should be used by a person who falls asleep 'uicklyJ (. =ow much time should be spent on a single direct attemptJ 3. ,hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of time than usualJ .. ,hat is the best way for an ine1perienced practitioner to rela1J 12. "an direct techni'ues substitute rela1ation techni'uesJ 11. "an rela1ation techni'ues substitute direct techni'uesJ 12. =ow many 9ariations for performing direct techni'ues are thereJ 1). &n what case is the 9ariation of se'uencing with direct techni'ues employedJ 1+. ,hich techni'ue may not be used for direct entrance to the phase with the goal of creating a free0floating state of mindJ 15. ,hat happens to consciousness while in a free0floating state during direct techni'uesJ 1-. !hould awakening be attempted if falling asleep occurred while using direct techni'uesJ -(
1(. ,hat is the probability of entering the phase without a free0floating state of consciousnessJ 13. ,hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni'ues most often end inJ 1.. &s se1ual acti9ity before an e9ening attempt using direct techni'ue beneficialJ Ta#!# 1. "hoose the best body position for direct techni'ues based on your indi9idual preferences. 2. 7se the classical 9ariation of performing direct techni'ues until it phase entrance< or falling asleep se9eral times. ). 7sing a combination of 9ariations for direct techni'ues< achie9e a free0floating state of mind. +. ,hen performing direct techni'ues< try to achie9e no less than three lapses in consciousness before 22 minutes elapse< or before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance is achie9ed.
-3
%ha"ter A , Becomi$g %o$#ciou# *hile +reami$g

T-) %O.%)PT O' T)%-.I2U)S I.6O16I.G B)%O/I.G %O.S%IOUS *-I1) +()A/I.G The techni'ues for phase entrance 9ia becoming conscious while dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self0 awareness during a dream< which< regardless of dream 'uality< can be transitioned into a fully reali>ed phase e1perience. "ontrary to popular opinion< ha9ing an out0of0body e1perience through dreaming differs little from other techni'ues@ the primary results of which may be persistently categori>ed as dissociati9e e1periences? being fully conscious while remo9ed from the perception of a physical body. The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni'ues< and< when deepened< the phase offers more 9i9id and lucid e1periences than those of e9eryday life. &f a practitioner becomes aware of a dream while in it :usually accompanied by a clear reali>ation that it is< A5ust a dreamB;< then the phase is e1perienced from that moment forward. %eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious while dreaming with induced dreaming. 6n induced dream is the dream of a specific topic< pro9oked on demand@ this does not presuppose consciousness. Moreo9er< not all practitioners clearly understand what it means to be fully conscious while dreaming. "onsciousness while dreaming is always present to some e1tent< but it is necessary to be as conscious as one would be in a wakeful state. 6wareness is not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. ,hen full understanding occurs that e9erything around is 5ust a dream< a person drops the dream and starts doing only -.
what he wants to do at that 9ery moment. 6nd after awakening< he should not think that what happened was absurd or une1plainable. *uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream< a practitioner8s actions must be completely subordinated to the desire to e1perience a 'uality phase. This is why< upon becoming conscious in a dream< proceeding to techni'ues related to deepening and maintaining is crucial. Techni'ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ 9ery much in nature from other techni'ues< and there are good reasons why these methods are differentiated from other practices< like so0 called astral pro6ection or out-of-"ody e,perience COB70. =owe9er< their characteristics differ 9ery little in terms of results. The techni'ue0related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific actions are not re'uired to produce immediate< concrete results. 6ll techni'ue0related elements are performed outside of when consciousness while dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible to take some action if you are not conscious and do not reali>e that you are dreaming. 6ll efforts are directed at making that 9ery reali>ation somehow occur. Interesting Fact! 7ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the techni9ues for "eco#ing conscious $hile drea#ing, "ut applies direct or indirect techni9ues, on average each fifth phase $ill still occur through "eco#ing conscious in a drea#) This has "een statistically proven at se#inars of the School of Out-of-Body Travel) Many stri9e to achie9e consciousness during each dream o9er the course of an entire night@ howe9er< this is rarely possible due to physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to switch off not only body< but also consciousness< so that it may unconsciously sift and process the 9ast 9olume of information obtained in e9eryday life. (2
The timeframe for achie9ing conscious dreaming is 9ery difficult to estimate due to the nature of re'uired actions. &ntensity and intention definitely e1ert hea9y influence. 6 practitioner may become conscious in a dream when first lapsing into sleep< regardless of when it occurs. Or< with regular attempts< this could happen in two weeks to a month. /e9ertheless< these techni'ues promise a much higher likelihood of success than direct methods< and can be compared with indirect techni'ues 0 inferior to the latter only in terms of the speed at which results are achie9ed and the amount of effort re'uired. ,hile indirect techni'ues yield ma1imum results in light of a full night8s rest< the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant factor to achie9ing dream consciousness. Therefore< this techni'ue is sure to guarantee entry into the phase< especially if difficulty has been encountered while practicing other techni'ues. Techni'ues used to attain dream consciousness should not be combined with other types of techni'ues. &t is better to focus on one thing at a time. +nterestingly, $hen a techni9ue is practiced on a regular "asis, there is nearly a 1 < guarantee that drea# consciousness $ill spontaneously occur) . practitioner #ust %no$ ho$ to react $hen this happens) T)%-.I2U)S 'O( B)%O/I.G %O.S%IOUS I. A +()A/ &t is possible to simultaneously practice se9eral techni'ues for becoming conscious in a dream since e9ery techni'ue is directly compatible and complementary to another. (emem eri$g +ream# There is a well known and widespread of fallacy that supposes that dreams do not occur for some people. 9eryone dreams< but not e9eryone remembers their dreams. 9en those who acti9ely dream remember only a small fraction of these nightly e1cursions. =ence< one should not think that it is impossible for someone who does not remember dreams to become conscious in one. !uch a person should simply try to use the techni'ues. (1
6t the same time< there is a direct correlation between the number of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious while dreaming. That is why de9eloping the ability to remember dreams is crucial. &n essence< the ability to achie9e dream consciousness rests with the conscious mind< which is 9ery much interconnected with memory0related processes. "onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams< but it lacks rapid< operati9e memory. *reamers may know who they are< their names< how to walk< and how to talk< but may not know how surrounding e9ents are related< or the nature of their significance. %y increasing the fre'uency of remembered dreams< short0 term dream memory becomes more de9eloped< which enables more realistic dream e1periences followed by a higher probability of dream consciousness. There are three techni'ues dedicated to increasing the number of remembered dreams. The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon awakening. ,ithin the first few minutes of waking up< try to remember as many dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done with a great amount of attention and diligence because this e1ercise strengthens the memory. &f possible< during the day< or< better yet< before going to sleep at night< recalling the pre9ious night8s dreams once again is highly beneficial. ,riting dreams down in a special dream 5ournal is much more effecti9e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning while memories are still fresh. The more details recalled when recording the dream< the better the ultimate results. This is a 9ery attenti9e approach that demands a higher awareness than simple recollection. ,riting dreams in a 5ournal significantly increases awareness of actions and aspirations. 6nother way of remembering dreams is to create a map of the dream world. This is called drea# cartography and is similar to keeping a 5ournal< though an enhanced le9el of awareness is de9eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map. 4irst< record one dream< describing locations and e9ents< which are plotted on the map. This cartographic process is repeated with each subse'uent dream< and after se9eral dreams an episode will occur that is somehow related to the location of a (2
dream that has already been recorded. The two dreams that took place near each other are plotted ne1t to each other on the map. O9er time< more and more interrelated dreams will occur and the map will become increasingly concentrated rather than disconnected. 6s a result< the fre'uency and realistic 'uality of remembered dreams will increase< and the dreamer will increase the ability to achie9e consciousness while dreaming. &t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after temporary awakenings 9ersus waiting until morning. To accomplish this< it helps to ha9e a pen and a piece of paper nearby so that a practitioner may 'uickly 5ot down a phase or se9eral key words from the plot of the dream before falling back asleep. 7sing this information< the ma5ority of dreams are 'uickly and completely recalled. The initial result from e1ercising these techni'ues is a rapid increase in the number of remembered dreams. ,hen this number becomes significant :anywhere between fi9e and 12 per night;< dream consciousness follows on a regular basis. I$te$tio$ &ntention is crucial to the success of any techni'ue. ,ith regard to dream consciousness< its significance is multiplied. The creation of intention is ine1tricably linked to the creation of internal aspiration< which has re9erberations in both conscious and unconscious states. &n reality< an ele9ated degree of intention operates as a powerful method of mental programming. This techni'ue is performed before falling asleep by affirming a strong desire to become conscious while dreaming. 4or best results< alongside a strong< clearly defined intention< think through what actions will be taken when dream consciousness is achie9ed. %reati$g a$ A$chor !ince dream consciousness is not linked to specific actions that take place within a dream and sensory perception continues to operate in the dream state< it is possible to de9elop and use an artificially conditioned refle1 to achie9e consciousness. The essence of this techni'ue is to train the consciousness to ()
uniformly react to certain stimuli that occur while being awake and when dreaming< establishing a habit of specific response e9ery time a certain situation occurs. 4or e1ample< while awake< a practitioner may ask< A6m & dreamingJB e9ery time they see an anchor. 6n anchor is any ob5ect that is often encountered while awake and while dreaming. 1amples of anchors include a practitioner8s own hands< red ob5ects< or running water. ,hen first using this techni'ue< a practitioner will be unable to 'uestion whether a dream is in progress e9ery time a pre0established anchor is encountered. =owe9er< with training and a strong desire this techni'ue 'uickly produces results. O9er time< subconscious 'uestioning of the practitioner8s state becomes habit< happening while awake and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness. &t is important to note that one needs not only to simply ask this 'uestion< but that it is also important to answer it mindfully< trying to isolate oneself from surrounding e9ents in order to be able to answer it in an as ob5ecti9e and unpredetermined way as possible. 4ailing to answer ob5ecti9ely will always result in a negati9e response :no;< and dream consciousness will not be achie9ed. .atural A$chor# &n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious dreaming< natural anchors should be gi9en focused attention. These are ob5ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness< e9en when consciousness is not desired. %eing aware of the e1istence of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance. The following e1periences are common natural anchors that are present in dreams? death< sharp pain< intense fear< stress< flying< electric shock< se1ual sensations< and dreaming about phase entrance or the phase en9ironment. ,hen attempting dream consciousness< identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 122E of the time. One may try to start flying each time that one answers the 'uestion. This is of course pointless when in waking reality. (+
=owe9er< when dreaming< this will most likely lead to flight and once again pro9e that e9erything around is 5ust a dream. Self-A$aly#i# "onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an absence of conscious awareness? these analyses are significant to attaining dream consciousness. O9er the course of a lifetime< the mind grows accustomed to the parado1ical nature of dreams and pays less attention to them. This becomes apparent while trying to understand that a red crocodile is unable to talk< cannot be red< nor can it rent an apartment. ,hile dreaming< these impossibilities are ne9er called into 'uestion. The essence of self0 analysis is remembering dreams and thinking hard about why their parado1ical features had not been ade'uately recogni>ed in the dream state. ,ith e1perience< the e9eryday analysis of the correspondence of dreams to reality begins to ha9e an effect on a practitioner8s reasoning within the dream state. 4or e1ample< that red crocodile8s presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that gi9e pause for reflection< which could in turn lead to the understanding that e9erything happening is 5ust a dream. A%TIO.S TO B) +O.) *-). B)%O/I.G %O.S%IOUS *-I1) +()A/I.G To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully de9eloped phase e1perience< one of three specific actions must be taken. The best is the techni'ue is deepening< which should be immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. *eepening must be performed within the dream episode before all other techni'ues. *oing so 9irtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The choice of actions that follow deepening is dependent upon a practitioner8s predetermined course of plan in the phase. ,hen becoming conscious while dreaming< it is 'uite dangerous to try to return to one8s body in order to roll out of it right away unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation where< after ha9ing easily returned to one8s body< (5
one would not be able to separate from it< as the phase becomes significantly weaker when physical sensations coincide with the position of a real body. &f one is to employ such an option< then in order to return to one8s body one should simply think about it< which is often sufficient to make the transition occur almost immediately. 6nother option is the use of translocation techni'ues to arri9e at a desired place within the phase world. &t is also dangerous to employ this 9ariation without first deepening@ translocating in a shallow phase makes a return to the wakeful state 9ery likely. Translocation is often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase state. ST(AT)GY 'O( A%TIO. To achie9e dream consciousness< constant practice is highly necessary because sporadic practice will fail to de9elop the re'uisite background thought processes. 6s a rule< employing phase entry techni'ues within the conte1t of dream consciousness produces results after se9eral weeks< and the effects of the techni'ues are increasingly pronounced with time. &f there are no results within a month or two< refrain from these techni'ues for a period of time< take a break for a week or two< and resol9e to assume a fresh start later. Practitioners often stop using these techni'ues after initial results as later effects become elusi9e and the fre'uency of dream consciousness rapidly declines. These techni'ues should not be abandoned after first yielding results< though a gradual decrease in practice is generally acceptable. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *-). P(A%TI%I.G B)%O/I.G %O.S%IOUS *-I1) +()A/I.G Percei9ing the state of dream consciousness as a non0phase state e9en though this phenomenon is one and the same with the phase.
(-
6ttempting dream consciousness while performing other phase entrance techni'ues when it is better to focus on dream consciousness alone. ,hen falling asleep< lacking sufficient desire to e1perience conscious dreaming e9en though this is critical. "ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e9en after achie9ing dream consciousness< whereas subse'uent actions must be independent and based on free will. &ncorrectly answering the 'uestion A6m & dreamingJB while dreaming. 4orgetting to immediately begin deepening techni'ues when dream consciousness has been achie9ed. ,hen e1ercising memory de9elopment< recalling the most 9i9id dreams instead of e9ery dream. &nconsistent concentration while practicing dream consciousness techni'ues. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( A 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hat is the difference between an out0of0body e1perience and dream consciousnessJ 2. 6fter attaining dream consciousness< does the realistic 'uality of the surroundings differ from that of wakefulnessJ ). ,hich techni'ue can be used in a dream to become conscious in itJ +. &s it possible to achie9e dream consciousness after the first attemptJ 5. &s it true that not all people dreamJ -. ,hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible important for becoming conscious while dreamingJ (. ,hat is dream cartographyJ 3. To e1perience dream consciousness< what must be done while falling asleepJ .. "ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie9e dream consciousnessJ ((
12. ,hat e1periences in dreams often spontaneously gi9e rise to a state of conscious awarenessJ 11. ,hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious while dreamingJ Ta#!# 1. 9ery day< immediately before going to sleep< culti9ate a strong desire to become conscious in future dreams. 2. ,hen you wake up< recall or write down the episodes and plots of your dreams e9ery day. ). Try to achie9e at least one instance of dream consciousness.
(3
%ha"ter = , .o$-auto$omou# /ethod#

T-) )SS).%) O' .O.-AUTO.O/OUS /)T-O+S 'O( ).T)(I.G T-) P-AS) 4on-autono#ous #ethods of entering the phase are various types of e,ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the phase state) "omputer programs< de9ices< 9arious physical actions< the aid of a helper< or e9en chemical substances are e1amples of non0autonomous methods. &n certain cases< these methods actually help while some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e1perience. /e9er count on a magical substance or machine to automatically eliminate the difficulties associated with phase entrance. &f such a substance e1isted< the whole topic of phase e1perimentation would e1ist at an ad9anced le9el of de9elopment and pre9alence in society. &n actuality< there are no de9ices or methods able to consistently pro9ide access to the phase state. 6t best< these e1ist in a largely supplementary capacity< and the more a practitioner is able to do on his or her own< the more helpful and effecti9e these supplements are. &f phase entry has not been mastered autonomously< then results through the use of supplements will be totally accidental. The reason behind the weak effecti9eness of non0 autonomous methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological process responsible for the phase e1perience cannot be e1actly defined. Only generalities are known< nothing else. &n order to gain a clear understanding of the state< the processes that gi9e rise to it must be discerned and analy>ed. 6ll e1isting technologies ha9e either blundered down a clearly mistaken path (.
:synchroni>ing the hemispheres of the brain;< or tra9elled toward the detection and use of indirect indicators :cueing technologies;. %U)I.G T)%-.O1OGI)S Of all non0autonomous assistance methods< cueing technologies yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing technologies is 'uite simple? a de9ice detects rapid eye mo9ement :R M; and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner< prompting dream consciousness or an awakening that may be followed by indirect techni'ues. "ueing programs or de9ices may also send indicators o9er specific inter9als of time@ these are recei9ed during R M sleep and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to awaken and attempt indirect techni'ues. More sophisticated R M0detecting technologies may be purchased at speciali>ed stores or through online merchandisers. R M0detecting technologies work by 9irtue of special night mask e'uipped with a motion sensor that detects the fre'uency of specific eye mo9ements that occur during R M sleep. ,hen the eye mo9ements reach R M 'uality< the de9ice sends discreet signals to the practitioner through light< sound< 9ibrations< or a combination of these. &n turn< the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it while sleeping with the goal of phase entry through dream consciousness. The effecti9eness of R M0detecting de9ices is more plausible in theory than in practice. The mind 'uickly de9elops a tolerance for these types of e1ternal stimuli and stops reacting< and< as a result< such technologies are hardly used more than one or two nights per week. !econdly< a practitioner will detect only a small portion of the signals< and conscious reaction occurs in e9en smaller instances. "ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allow a practitioner to awaken without mo9ing during R M sleep< which facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect techni'ues. Pricing of these Amind0machinesB :the common moniker of any de9ice that purports to produce altered consciousness; widely 9aries and is determined by 'uality of R M detection and 32
signaling. 69ailable models include? *ream!talker< *reamMaker :/o9a*reamer;< R M0*reamer< 6stral "atapult< among many others. !ince the use of these de9ices does not guarantee increased success in practice< in9esting money in the technology is not recommended. &f a practitioner is curious about cueing technologies< similar de9ices may be constructed at home using a special computer program and a run0of0the0mill optical mouse. *esigns for a homegrown setup are easily located on the &nternet. 6nother do0it0yourself way of e1perimenting with cueing is through the use of a computer< a music player< or e9en the alarm clock function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa9es short sounds or phrases< played as an alarm e9ery 15 to )2 minutes while sleeping. These sounds will signal the practitioner to wake up and attempt indirect techni'ues. &f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology< se9eral fundamental principles should be considered as results will be less likely if they are ignored. 4irst< mind0machines should be used no more than twice a week. Otherwise< too high a tolerance will be built up< rendering the machines ineffecti9e. !econd< use cueing technology in combination with the deferred method< which was co9ered in the section on indirect techni'ues. &t is better to sleep for si1 hours without distraction and then< after sleep has been interrupted< put on a sleep0mask or earpiece and continue sleeping. !leep will be light for the remaining two to four hours as there will be more R M sleep< making it easier for the mind to detect cueing signals. 4inally< master indirect techni'ues before making use of cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse'uent phase entrance. *O(3I.G I. PAI(S ,orking in pairs is considered the second most effecti9e non0autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be the acti9e one< and the other fills the role of helper. The acti9e one practitioner attempts to enter the phase while the helper pro9ides 9arious types of support to this end. 4or e1ample< the acti9e practitioner lies down in bed while the helper stays nearby< waiting for the acti9e one to fall asleep. 31
,hen sleep occurs< the helper obser9es the eyes of the acti9e< watching for the signs of R M sleep< which is mainly characteri>ed by 'uick eye mo9ements. ,hen R M is apparent< the helper whispers to the sleeper< communicating that e9erything the practitioner is e1periencing is a dream. The helper may 9ary the 9olume of the whisper< use touch to strengthen the signal< or shine a flashlight on the sleeper8s eyelids # which is 9ery effecti9e. The acti9e practitioner should detect the signals without waking and indicate a state of conscious awareness by performing 'uick< cyclical eye mo9ements. &f no such indication is gi9en< the helper continues to rouse the acti9e practitioner< who may finally wake. &f the acti9e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream< indirect techni'ues should be performed. The acti9e practitioner should under no circumstances mo9e upon awakening or waste 9aluable seconds before transitioning to indirect attempts. &f phase entrance does not occur after e1ercising the techni'ues< the practitioner should again fall asleep with the intention of making another attempt. $enerally< se9eral such attempts are enough to glean results. ,orking in pairs is best performed 5ust prior to a daytime nap< or with the same deferred method used for indirect techni'ues 0 an early0morning interruption of a practitioner8s nighttime sleep. T)%-.O1OGI)S 'O( I.+U%I.G T-) P-AS) The ambition to create a de9ice facilitates 'uick and easy phase entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim to fulfill such a role. 6s already stated< none of these de9ices has been pro9en effecti9e. The most famous of these is the =emi0!ync system< which purports to synchroni>e the two hemispheres of the brain. =emi0 !ync was de9eloped by Robert Monroe< an 6merican esotericism e1pert researcher. The idea behind =emi0!ync is that out0of0body sensations may be induced by achie9ing synchroni>ation of the brain8s two hemispheres. =owe9er< this type of approach yields a 32
parado1 for the lack of scientific :or pseudo0scientific; e9idence that hemispheric synchroni>ation influences sensory perception. 6ctually< it is the cerebral corte1 and constituents that are primarily responsible for sensory perception. 6t the beginning of the 22th century< it became clear that the key roles in sensory processes are played by 9arying le9els of inhibition and acti9ity in the cerebral corte1< and almost not elsewhere. The key to sol9ing the problem of technologically induced phase entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte1. !ynchroni>ation de9ices ha9e no effect on the operation of the cerebral corte1. The idea of using sounds of 9arious fre'uencies to induce a specific le9el of electrical acti9ity in the brain is< so far< considered impossible. Thus< the sounds and noises used to assist separation from the body cannot directly affect the process< but merely ser9e as cueing signals. !uch a system works only after ha9ing been used for a long time< if it works at all. Moreo9er< it might only work once or twice. /e9ertheless< synchroni>ation systems are able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of consciousness since the systems pre9ent sleep or induce wakefulness< pro9iding fertile ground for direct phase entry. =owe9er< the systems ha9e nothing at all to do with synchroni>ing the two hemispheres of the brain. The idea of inducing 9arious phase states through sound has gained wide attention. Many other programs and technologies ha9e appeared as a result< including< for e1ample< the %rain ,a9e $enerator :%,$;< which allows the practitioner to independently e1periment with a wide array of sounds and fre'uencies and 9arious methods of transmission. The effect is the same? cueing during sleep or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus< there is no noticeable difference between using machines and listening to similar sounds or musical compositions. &nasmuch as the de9ices described abo9e ha9e not deli9ered notable result< the search for new technologies continues unhindered. The number of ideas to e1ert nonin9asi9e influence o9er the brain and its constituent parts is increasing. 4or e1ample< there is a theory that phase e1periences may be induced by electromagnetically stimulating the left angular gyrus. =owe9er< this< like all other non0autonomous methods< is strictly 3)
based on theory. 6t present< consistent< focused< unassisted practice is the simplest and only guaranteed means to achie9ing phase entrance. -YP.OSIS A.+ SUGG)STIO. =ypnosis is a little0studied method of entering the phase. The idea is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is an interesting concept< especially for persons who easily yield to power of suggestion< but such indi9iduals account for only 1E of the population. *ue to specific characteristics of human perception< the chances are nil that hypnosis is a likely conduit to phase entrance. !o< it seems unlikely that hypnotic techni'ues will become well0 known< or that a top0notch hypnotist would< through suggestion< easily be able to lead a sub5ect directly into the phase. =owe9er< it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may promote higher fre'uency in dream consciousness or awakening without mo9ing :and remembering to do indirect techni'ues;. =ere again< this method is only a facilitator< while actual phase entrance depends on the efforts of the practitioner. P-YSIO1OGI%A1 SIG.A1S The simplest way to supplement the practice is establishing a reminder that prompts conscious awakening and subse'uent indirect techni'ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder is immediately felt when the practitioner wakes< prompting the attempt of indirect techni'ues. &n actuality< mind0machines work using the same principle since these are most effecti9e as cues that arouse an intention to perform a specific action. 6 more sophisticated e1ample of a reminder is when a practitioner do>es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a certain body part. ,hile awakening< the practitioner will take the 3+
physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni'ues. 6 secondary benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb body part may easily be used to perform phantom wiggling. 4alling asleep while lying on the back with an arm behind the head< or by lying directly on an arm are effecti9e e1amples. These and other postures will impede circulation< cause numbness< and promote awakening. /aturally< the numbness should not be e1cessi9e. *i9erse e1periments that e1ploit physiological needs are especially popular for inducing conscious awakening or becoming conscious while dreaming. 4or e1ample< a practitioner may forgo water o9er the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase. The effect is an acute thirst while dreaming< which may be used to communicate that the dream state has taken o9er. Or< thirst causes repeated awakenings< during which the practice of indirect techni'ues may commence. 6n alternati9e to depri9ing the body of water is including more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep. 6nother method is to drink a lot of water before sleep< causing the practitioner to awaken< naturally producing an opportunity to perform indirect techni'ues. 7sing this has been known to result in dream consciousness. 6nother popular method helps with direct techni'ues. &t works by falling asleep while keeping the forearm propped up at the elbow. ,hen the practitioner falls asleep< the forearm falls to the bed as the body shuts down. 4eeling the arm fall signals a lapse of consciousness< after which direct techni'ues may be attempted. &f this method fails to produce results on the first try< it may be repeated by raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some< but rarely on the first try. &t should not be counted as panacea. Dike all other non0autonomous methods< practicing phase entrance using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis. There are more pleasant< autonomous techni'ues that only re'uire a natural willpower and healthy desire. %-)/I%A1 SUBSTA.%)S 35
!ince the beginning< the history of ad9ances in phase entrance methodologies has included a direct link to the use of consumable supplements< starting with plants and mushrooms in ancient times. The use of speciali>ed herbs< mushrooms< and cacti is still practiced in isolated cultures@ !iberian shamans and /orth 6merican &ndians< for e1ample. 6mid the hunger for altered states of awareness< these chemical supplements ha9e reached e9ery corner of the de9eloped world. =owe9er< the proliferation of these substances has caused a marked degradation in the progress of modern phase practice. The names and descriptions of these 9arious chemical concoctions< herbs and plants included< are not worthy of inclusion in this te1t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries while still a9ailable in the pharmacies of others@ ne9ertheless< they are all dangerous. There are two primary problems with using such supplements. 4irst< practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical substances and 9arious herbal supplements is not a path to de9elopment< but to ruin. *rug abuse and personal de9elopment are polar opposites< in no way compatible. "heap thrills are consistently followed by chemical dependencies and health problems. !econd< although a user may e1perience phase sensations under the influence of such substances< the 'uality of e1perience is completely different. &t is not only the stability or depth of phase that are affected by these supplements< but a user8s consciousness and awareness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of mental processes negati9ely impact self0 awareness. The phase must be accompanied by two things? phase sensations and a complete< conscious awareness. &f one of these is missing< then the state e1perienced< by definition< is not the phase. ,hen descriptions of these chemically AenhancedB e1periences are studied< the hallmark of e9ery one is a complete lack of control. 7sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase must be ruled out. !ummarily< these make it impossible to e1perience the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health. 3-
T-) 'UTU() O' .O.-AUTO.O/OUS /)T-O+S 'O( ).T)(I.G T-) P-AS) 9en though no beneficial non0autonomous technologies currently e1ist< the future is wide open before them. ,ith the de9elopment of effecti9e technologies< the phase will cease as the e1clusi9e domain of the initiated and become a widespread practice. Only then will the :sometimes 5ustified; stereotypes and pre5udices connected to the mystical nature of the phenomenon be dispelled< and only then will the phase gain the necessary attention from researchers needed to ably de9elop the science of phase practice. ,hen e1ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are disco9ered< the human e1perience will drastically change. These technologies for inducing and monitoring phase e1periences will open up incredible possibilities. 4or e1ample< it will be possible to participate in a mo9ie instead of 5ust watching@ people will be able to try and e9aluate products without lea9ing home@ tra9el throughout designed worlds will take place@ computer games will be substituted with analogous e1periences including real physical sensations. The ultimate step would be the unification of phase e1periences into a collecti9e< parallel world integrated to e1istent digital networks? the Matri1 :the Mindnet;. 7sing this Matri1< it will be possible to communicate with someone on the other side of the planet 0 not 5ust through a broadband 9ideo link< but literally tDte E tDte. This 9ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that will open with phase entrance technologies. The first step toward the future is a thorough< pragmatic< and correct application of the techni'ues now a9ailable. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- .O.-AUTO.O/OUS T)%-.I2U)S
3(
The belief that de9ices are able to phase entrance if autonomous techni'ues fail< e9en though it is much easier to enter the phase through strictly indi9idual efforts. ,asting a large amount of time and effort on 9arious technologies to create a phase state. /o such technology e1ists. 7sing cueing technologies on a daily basis< e9en though they aren8t supposed to be used more than twice a week. 7sing cueing technologies all night long< when it is much better to use these in con5unction with the deferred method. 7sing cueing technologies without affirming a personal intention of appropriate reaction to the signals? this is crucial to cue effecti9eness. ,orking in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep< e9en though R M sleep occurs infre'uently< and then for only short periods of time. ,hile working in pairs< the helper gi9ing an acti9e practitioner too strong a signal. !ignals should be kept discreet to pre9ent waking the sleeper. mploying an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre'uency of dream consciousness. The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner who is not susceptible to hypnosis. 7sing physiological signals on a daily basis< causing physical discomfort 9ersus getting en5oyment out of the practice. The belief chemical substances promote dissociati9e e1periences. 6cting on this belief is e'ui9alent to drug abuse. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( = 2ue#tio$# 1. 6re techni'ues based on breathing be considered non0 autonomous methods of entering the phaseJ 2. ,hich non0autonomous and non0chemical means allow phase entrance after the first attemptsJ ). ,hy is it still not possible to create a de9ice that causes phase entryJ 33
+. 6re cueing technologies beneficial to o9ercoming difficulties with conscious awakeningJ 5. ,hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for se9en days in a rowJ -. "an cueing technologies make use of light signalsJ (. "an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phase entryJ 3. ,ill putting a tight rubber band around an ankle promote phase entryJ .. ,hile working in a pair< are both practitioners re'uired to enter the phaseJ 12. "an the helper be compared to a cueing de9ice while working in a pairJ 11. ,hen should the helper gi9e the signal that the acti9e practitioner is dreamingJ 12. ,ould a hypnotist making suggestions about entering the phase be helpful to e9ery practitionerJ 1). ,hy do phase0inducing technologies sometimes work< e9en though these are based on flawed theoriesJ 1+. ,hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substancesJ Ta#!# 1. Try using a cueing de9ice se9eral times in con5unction with the deferred method. "reate a short sound file and set it to a de9ice that plays the file between 150minute inter9als of silence. 2. %efore going to sleep at night< try the raised forearm method of entering the phase se9eral times. 6ttempt this using the deferred method. ). &f you ha9e the opportunity< try to achie9e entry into the phase by working in pairs.
3.
.2
Part II /a$agi$g the Out-of-Body )?"erie$ce
%ha"ter C - +ee"e$i$g
T-) %O.%)PT O' +))P).I.G 8eepening refers to techni9ues that induce realistic perception and a$areness in the phase state) The phase is not an e1act< fi1ed state where a practitioner is present or not. &t is a realm of states characteri>ed by a transition from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete alienation from it< while maintaining consciousness and reality of perception< albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins with perception of the natural< physical body followed by a moment of ambiguity where a clear e1perience of body is intermingled with a sense of the percei9ed body. 6fterward< the percei9ed body enters the phase space< while the physical body becomes a memory. 6t this point< the percei9ed senses may be 'uite dull@ for e1ample< 9ision may be blurred or completely absent. *eepening techni'ues sol9e the problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase. !ensory e1periences within a fully reali>ed phase e1perience are as realistic as those in e9eryday reality. &n almost one0half of all cases< practitioners obser9e that reality0based surroundings pale in comparison to 9ibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this end< after entering the phase< a practitioner must perform deepening techni'ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 'uality of phase reality.
.1
4ull spatial perception in the phase only occurs after deepening techni'ues ha9e been applied. There would be no point to remaining in the phase without deepening. 4or e1ample< what is the point in finding a person in phase< if it is not e9en possible to discern his or her eyes thereJ +n a considera"le nu#"er of cases, deepening is not necessary, since the phase e,perience is co#pletely realistic, if not hyper-realistic) +n cases li%e these, deepening #ay "e "ypassed) *eepening is also related to the length of time a practitioner may remain in the phase. &f an action is taken without a deep< realistic phase< the e1perience will always be se9eral times shorter in duration than a phase where deepening techni'ues had been applied. The properties of the phase space 9ery much depend on its depth. ,hen surroundings are blurry and unclear< the stability of ob5ects is 9ery weak. There is a direct correlation between the realism of a phase and a practitioner8s le9el of awareness< so it is e1tremely important to ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma1imum awareness. Interesting Fact! The realis# of a deep phase space is often so great that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc% )
.2
*eepening should only be performed following complete separation from the body. &f initiated before separation< the phase may end prematurely. &f complete separation does not occur< primary deepening should be used. 6s regards the deepening techni'ues themsel9es< there is one main one and there are se9eral subsidiary ones. The main techni'ue< which does not present any difficulties< is sufficient for ha9ing a successful practice. Interesting Fact! +gnorance of deepening techni9ues has led to a great nu#"er of "aseless theories and superstitions) So#e practices treat differing phase depths as various states and even $orlds) +n reality, there are si#ple actions that ensure a singular phase e,perience) P(I/A(Y +))P).I.G T)%-.I2U)S The goal of primary deepening is to achie9e complete separation from the body< allowing further actions within the .)
phase. Primary deepening entails achie9ing two principal ob5ecti9es? complete separation from the physical body and anchoring the percei9ed body within the phase space. ,hen separation from the body occurs through the use of a separation techni'ue< a posture must be assumed that completely different from the posture of the real< physical body. The greater the degree of postural similarity between the physical and percei9ed bodies< the more shallow and brief the phase will be. 4or e1ample< in the case of hori>ontal le9itation< a 132 turn must immediately performed< arms and legs spread< adopting a 9ertical posture. 7nder no circumstances should a practitioner in the phase remain in a posture identical to that of the physical body. &f a practitioner is pulled back toward the body after separation< anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing or sitting in the phase. Resisting the gra9ity of the physical body is paramount to remaining in the phase. The result of willful resistance is directly proportional to the degree of applied effort. &t will help to grab hold of surrounding ob5ects and hold on to them@ any means of anchoring the percei9ed body within the phase are appropriate. &t is possible to start rotating around an a1is@ not simply imagining the rotation< but performing it with the percei9ed body as well. +))P).I.G T-(OUG- S).SO(Y A/P1I'I%ATIO. The more a phase is e1perienced by the sensory faculties< the deeper and longer the phase will be. !ensory amplification in the phase is the most effecti9e deepening techni'ue precisely because it allows the acti9ation of primary internal sensations during the transition from reality to the phase. There are se9eral ways to perform sensory amplification. Falpation is the first deepening techni'ue that should be recalled when entering the phase. Fision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e1perience< but the sensation of occupying a defined space is .+
almost always present. &n the case of a completely absent sense of sight< only tactile0kinesthetic perception is possible. That is< mo9ement throughout a space and the touching ob5ects there is the only option when 9ision is absent. The sense of touch plays a key role in the perception of e9eryday reality. 6ccordingly< if the sense of touch is acti9ely used in the phase space< it is only natural that the phase will deepen and reach its ma1imum potential. Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by 'uickly but carefully percei9ing the feel of surfaces and shapes. =ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one second< remaining constantly in motion to locate new ob5ects. The goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about encountered ob5ects or shapes. 4or e1ample< if one feels a mug< one may touch it not only from the outside< but also from the inside. Once a practitioner has rolled out of the body< the bed may be touched@ the physical body lying in bed may be touched< as well as the floor< the carpet< nearby walls< or a bedside table. 6nother palpation techni'ue is performed by rubbing the palms against each other as if trying to warm them on a cold day. %lowing on the palms also produces sensations that will help deepen the phase. !ince tactile perception of the world is not limited to the palms< the hands should be mo9ed o9er the entire body while in the phase to e1cite and fully acti9ate the sense of touch. 6s soon as palpation begins< the feeling that the phase is deepening and becoming fi1ed soon follows. 7sually< it takes fi9e to 12 seconds of palpation e1ercises to reach the ma1imum le9el of deepening. 6fter performing this techni'ue< the pseudo0 physical sensations will be indistinguishable from those of e9eryday reality. &f 9ision is absent on phase entry< it 'uickly emerges during palpation. Feering is the primary technical 9ariation of sensory amplification. =owe9er< it is not always initially accessible since it re'uires 9ision< which may begin as absent in the phase. Once 9ision appears or has been created using special techni'ues :see .5
"hapter 3;< peering may begin. The effecti9eness of this techni'ue originates in the fact that 9ision is the human8s primary instrument of perception. Therefore< by e1citing 9ision to its ma1imum potential within the phase< it is possible to attain a fully immersi9e phase state that is completely apart from normal reality. Peering should be done at a distance of four to si1 inches from ob5ects within the phase. 6 practitioner should glance o9er the minute details of ob5ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phase space while increasing the 'uality of 9ision. ,hen looking at hands< the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be e1amined. &f obser9ing a wall< study the te1ture of its wallpaper. ,hen looking at a mug< one should look carefully at its handle< the cur9e of its rim< or any inscriptions. 6ttention should not remain on one area of an ob5ect for more than half a second. 6cti9e obser9ation should constantly mo9e to new ob5ects and their minute details< approaching ob5ects or picking them up to draw them nearer. &t8s best when ob5ects near one another@ otherwise< too much time is spent mo9ing around. Peering brings 'uick and clear results. 7sually< if 9ision is blurry and there is a yearning to return into the physical body< with 5ust )012 seconds of peering all of this will be gone without a trace. 6fter peering< 9ision ad5usts as 'uickly and clearly as if a camera lens was correctly installed in front of the eyes< capturing the image in the sharpest of focus. Si#ultaneous peering and palpation pro9ide the ma1imum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory amplification engages the two most important percepti9e< thus the effect is twice greater than when the two actions are separately performed. &f 9ision is present in the phase< simultaneous peering and palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase depth in the 'uickest and simplest manner. The combination of palpation and peering must not only be performed simultaneously< but also upon the same ob5ects. 4or e1ample< while a practitioner may look at the hands and simultaneously rub them against each other@ or while looking at a coffee mug< all of its parts may be obser9ed and touched at the .-
same. &t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action< remembering that feelings should be e1perienced not half0 heartedly< remembering that full concentration on sensory amplification is an e1cellent means to a deep< 'uality phase. S)%O.+A(Y +))P).I.G T)%-.I2U)S +ivi$g -eadfir#t *i9ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni'ues do not work< or when the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space where there is nothing to touch or look at. This techni'ue works thanks to the unusual 9estibular sensations that it causes< which help to enhance perception. This techni'ue is performed with the eyes shut if 9ision is a9ailable and the practitioner literally di9es headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 6 feeling of mo9ement away from the physical body will immediately arise during the flight down< and the di9e itself will be e1perienced as if it is really happening. !imultaneously< the surrounding space may darken and become colder. 6gitation or fear may also appear. 6fter fi9e to 15 seconds of flight< the practitioner is either arri9es in an undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end< like a wall. &n the case of a dead end< a translocation techni'ue should be used. Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur during the flight< if sense perception stops impro9ing< or if a good degree of realism has already been achie9ed. 6n alternati9e to the translocation techni'ue? hold the hands about four to si1 inches in front of the face and try to obser9e them without opening the eyes@ this will mo9e the practitioner to another random location. ,hen falling headfirst< do not think about the floor@ assume that it will be penetrated. This 9ery effecti9e if the phase has not reached a fullness of depth. 6 desire to not simply fall down obser9ing one8s perceptions< but instead race swiftly downward while trying to mo9e away from the body is e1tremely important. &n case of failure to do so< instead of deepening< such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being awake< i.e. to a foul. .(
6i ratio$ Dike falling headfirst< the 9ibration techni'ue should be used if sensory amplification techni'ues do not work< or when the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space where there is nothing to touch or look at. 6fter separating from the body< it is normally 'uite easy to create 9ibrations by thinking about them< by straining the brain< or by straining the body without using muscles. The occurrence of 9ibrations pro9ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 6n ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it does not re'uire any preliminary actions and thus may be practiced at any moment. The brain is strained to the ma1imum e1tent possible< which cause 9ibrations that may be intensified and managed through spasmodic or prolonged straining. &f this techni'ue does not produce deepening after fi9e to 12 seconds< the techni'ue has to be changed or action should be taken at the practitioner8s current depth in the phase. Aggre##ive Actio$ This techni'ue may be used as an alternati9e to any other deepening techni'ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing this techni'ue only re'uires aggressi9e action of the percei9ed body. 6 practitioner may run< roll on the floor< perform gymnastics< or mo9e the arms and legs. Ma1imum acti9ity and aggression are paramount to the successful use of this techni'ue. &f the practitioner is stuck in a dark space< wa9ing the arms and legs from side to side is appropriate. &f the practitioner is in water< swimming with determined< powerful strokes would be suitable recourse. The type of action 9ery much depends on the specific situation along with an aggressi9e desire on the part of the practitioner. 6s a rule< the effect of such mo9ements and relocations comes 'uite 'uickly< especially if attention is focused on all the accompanying sensations. Imagi$i$g reality This interesting techni'ue should be used by e1perienced practitioners< or if all other deepening techni'ues fail. .3
6 practitioner aggressi9ely imagines being located in the physical world< e1periencing its intrinsic reality of perception< and not in the phase. This should be done while in a state of separation from the body with a sense of 9ision present. &f successful< the surrounding phase space will immediately brighten and sensory perception of the phase will e1ceed the normal e1perience of reality. &f this techni'ue produces no clear results after a few seconds< another techni'ue should be used. G).)(A1 A%TI6ITY 6ll deepening techni'ues should be practiced with a high le9el of aggression< with no pauses< only continuous< deliberate action. &f techni'ues are practiced in a calm< rela1ed manner< then deepening attempts will most often result in falling asleep or returning to the body. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S +U(I.G +))P).I.G 4orgetting to perform deepening techni'ues when necessary. "arrying out unnecessary deepening while at a sufficient depth. =alting deepening techni'ues before reaching ma1imum realism in the phase. "arrying out main deepening techni'ues prior to ha9ing become completely separated from the body< although at this time only primary deepening should be used. "ontinuing deepening techni'ues when results ha9e already been achie9ed. 6lternating too 'uickly between deepening techni'ues instead of concentrating on each of them for at least fi9e to 12 seconds. Performing the techni'ues slowly and calmly instead of aggressi9ely. 6pplying techni'ues of sensory amplification while stuck in a shapeless< dark space when these should only be performed in a 9i9id and realistic place. ..
Obser9ing ob5ects located too far from the eyes during 9isual sensori>ation instead of the re'uired four to fi9e inches. ,hen peering< scrutini>ing a single detail of an ob5ect for too long when it is necessary to 'uickly switch from one detail to another. Taking in a whole ob5ect when peering while only parts of it should be obser9ed. "oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob5ect instead of focusing on different ob5ects in 'uick succession. Dong palpation of a single ob5ect during sensory amplification instead of rapidly switching from one ob5ect to another. *eepening while standing in place when it is important to maintain constant motion. 4alling headfirst with the eyes open< although the eyes must be shut to a9oid crashing into the floor. 4alling headfirst without the desire or intention of falling far and 'uickly. 4orgetting to use translocation techni'ues after hitting a dead end. 4orgetting to alternate deepening techni'ues if some of them are not working. 4ear of the hyperrealism of the e1perience and halting deepening instead of calmly continuing with the techni'ue. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( C 2ue#tio$# 1. 6fter which phase entrance techni'ues is deepening necessaryJ 2. ,hy is phase deepening necessaryJ ). 6re there cases where phase deepening is unnecessaryJ +. ,hat le9el of reality should be achie9ed by deepeningJ 5. ,hen should deepening begin after entering the phaseJ -. *oes deepening influence the length of a phase e1perienceJ (. ,hy is primary deepening necessaryJ 122
3. May one touch one8s head when the performing sensori>ation of feelingsJ .. !hould a practitioner look at curtains while peeringJ 12. &s it effecti9e to apply peering at phase ob5ects from a distance of 1 to 1.5 yardsJ 11. "an peering be used during palpationJ 12. ,hen should the eyes be closed while falling headfirstJ 1). ,ould throwing punches like a bo1er help a practitioner to deepenJ 1+. =ow calmly should the deepening techni'ues be performedJ Ta#!# 1. *e9ote the ne1t three successful phases to perfecting deepening techni'ues< using all of the methods described in this chapter. 2. 7sing personal e1perience< try 5udging which techni'ue suits you best from personal e1perience.
121
%ha"ter D - /ai$tai$i$g
T-) G).)(A1 %O.%)PT O' /AI.TAI.I.G Fhase #aintenance or &#aintaining* refers to techni9ues that allo$ a practitioner to re#ain in the phase for the #a,i#u# a#ount of ti#e possi"le) ,ithout knowledge of AmaintainingB techni'ues< the duration of the phase will be se9eral times shorter than it could otherwise be. The shortest phases last 5ust a few seconds. %eginning practitioners usually fear not being able to e1it a phase@ this shouldn8t e9er be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain the phase state< which is easily lost unless phase maintenance techni'ues are used.
Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles? resisting a return to the wakeful state :known as a foul;< resisting falling asleep< and resisting a false e1it from the phase. 6s a rule< the first two problems :return to a wakeful state< or falling asleep; 122
are often encountered by beginners< but the third difficulty :false e1it; manifests at later stages of practice. Resistance to returning to the body is self0e1planatory< whereas resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. /ot e9eryone knows that almost half of phase e1periences usually end in a 'uite tri9ial way 0 falling asleep. 6 person usually looses attenti9eness< his or her awareness dissipates< and e9erything around gradually looses clarity and turns into what is for all intents and purposes a usual dream. Resisting a false e1it from the phase is a lot more surprising and dramatic. !ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e1it from the phase< subse'uent deepening techni'ues fail to work< resulting in what seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. !ure that the phase has ended< a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep after percei9ing a few steps. &n such cases< falling asleep most often happens without any mo9ement< but while still lying in bed. The problem is that the difference between the phase and reality can be so subtle that in terms of internal or e1ternal indicators< the phase practically can8t be distinguished from reality. Therefore< one must know the necessary actions to take in the e9ent that the phase ceases< since the end of a phase could actually be a trick and purely imagined. There are specific solutions for the three problems described in addition to general rules that apply to any phase e1perience. !tudying these rules should be gi9en 5ust as high a priority as studying the specific solutions< since only some of them< when applied separately< may help one to remain in the phase se9eral times longer than usual. &n some cases< techni'ues for maintaining are not applicable. =owe9er< knowledge of how to maintain is useful for the ma5ority of e1periences. 6lso< there might be situations when someone need only resist a foul< while someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 6ll of this is 9ery specific to each case and can be determined only in practice. ,ith perfect knowledge of all the techni'ues for maintaining< a phase may last two to four minutes< which doesn8t sound like an e1tended duration< but really is. 6 particularity of the phase space is that achie9ing something and mo9ing around in 12)
it takes a minimum amount of time< mere seconds. Thus< so much can be done during ) minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list< so as not to waste any time. There are theories that ha9e neither been pro9en nor dispro9en claiming that time in the phase contracts and e1pands relati9e to real time. Thus< one minute of real time while in the phase may feel much longer in terms of phase time. Perception of time 9aries from practitioner to practitioner. /o9ices especially percei9e a real minute as more like fi9e to 12 minutes in the phase. This is determined by the particularities of indi9idual psychology< state of mind< and the type of e9ents that occur in the phase. &n order to understand how long a phase really lasted< one does not need to try using a stopwatch in the real world. &t is better to count how many actions took place in it and how much time each of them could ha9e taken. The result will differ from one8s first rough estimate se9eral times o9er. The ma1imum duration the phase 9aries depends hea9ily on the ability to apply phase maintenance techni'ues. !ome practitioners ha9e difficulty breaking the two0minute barrier while some find it easy to remain in the phase for 12 minutes or longer. &t is physically impossible to remain in the phase fore9er because e9en a 220minute phase is unheard of. T)%-.I2U)S A.+ (U1)S AGAI.ST ()TU(.I.G TO T-) BO+Y Of the following techni'ues< constant sensory amplification and as0needed sensory amplification are applied the most often while performing phase maintenance. =owe9er< as opposed to other technical elements of phase e1ploration< other secondary techni'ues of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate for certain indi9iduals. Thus< all the techni'ues should be studied< but the first two should be considered 9ery carefully. %o$#ta$t Se$#ory Am"lificatio$ 12+
The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on deepening :"hapter -; also applies to AmaintainingB. &n essence< ha9ing achie9ed the necessary depth of phase< one should not stop to acti9ely agitate his or her perception but should keep on doing this all the while< albeit not as acti9ely as during deepening. The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase< all action should be focused on e1periencing the ma1imum possible amount of tactile0kinesthetic and 9isual perceptions. This entails constantly touching and e1amining e9erything in minute detail. 4or e1ample< if passing by a bookcase< touch and e1amine some of the books in it< including their pages and corners. Tactile obser9ation should be performed on e9ery encountered ob5ect. Palpation may be applied separately as a background sensation. This is done in order not to o9erload the sense of sight. The hands should be touching something all the time< or better still< rubbing each other. A#-.eeded Se$#ory Am"lificatio$ 6pplying the as0needed sensory amplification techni'ue is no different than constant sensory amplification. &t is used only when a foul :a return to a wakeful state; is imminent or when phase 9ision starts to blur and fade. 4or e1ample< while tra9eling in the phase e9erything may start to blur< signaling a weakening of the phase. 6t this moment< the practitioner should touch e9ery a9ailable ob5ect@ obser9e e9erything in fine detail. 6s soon as returns to a clear and realistic state< actions may be continued without needing to perform amplification. %o$#ta$t 6i ratio$ This techni'ue is used to maintain constant< strong 9ibrations in the phase. 6s pre9iously noted< 9ibrations are generated by straining the brain or tensing the body without using muscles. Maintaining strong 9ibrations will ha9e a positi9e effect on the length of the phase. Stre$gthe$i$g 6i ratio$# a# .eeded 125
&n this case< 9ibrations are created and strengthened only if signs of a foul become apparent. 1amples of foul indicators include duality of perception or blurred 9ision. !trengthening 9ibrations will help to deepen the phase< allowing a practitioner to stay and continue within the phase. +ivi$g -eadfir#t This techni'ue is the same as the deepening techni'ue of the same name. &f a phase is about to dissol9e< di9ing headfirst with the eyes shut and a desire to di9e as 'uickly and deeply as possible. 6s soon as phase depth returns< translocation techni'ues may be used to keep from arri9ing at a dead end. 'orced 'alli$g A#lee" 6s soon as indicators of a foul appear< immediately lie down on the floor and attempt forced falling asleep@ the same as the phase entry techni'ue. 6fter successfully performing the techni'ue :)012sec.; < a practitioner may get up and continue to tra9el through the phase since the perception of reality and its depth will most likely be restored. Resist actually fall asleep. (otatio$ &f indicators of a foul appear< the practitioner should start rotating around the head0to0feet a1is. 7nlike the phase entry techni'ue of the same name< the mo9ement does not ha9e to be imagined. This is an absolutely real rotation in the phase. 6fter se9eral re9olutions< depth will be restored and actions may be continued. &f indicators of a foul persist< rotation should continue until proper depth is achie9ed. %ou$ti$g *uring the entire phase< count to as large a number possible 0 not 5ust for the sake of counting< but with a strong desire to reach the highest number possible. "ounting may be performed silently or out loud. This techni'ue works by creating a strong determination to remain in the phase by pro9iding a goal that re'uires action in the phase. 12-
1i#te$i$g i$ &f there are any background sounds similar to those heard while entering the phase 0 rumbling< whistling< ringing< bu>>ing< or si>>ling # these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by aggressi9e attempts at listening in< hearing the entire range of internal sounds. The forced listening in techni'ue may also be used for phase maintenance. -oo!i$g o$to the "ha#e 6nother interesting method of AmaintainingB is hooking onto the phase. &n the e9ent of an impending foul< grab onto an ob5ect in the phase acti9ely palpate or s'uee>e it. 9en if a return to the body occurs during this techni'ue< the hands will continue to hold the phase ob5ect and the physical hands will not be percei9ed. %eginning with these phantom feelings in the hands< separation from the body is possible. 6ny nearby ob5ect may be hooked? the leg of a chair< a drinking glass< a doorknob< a stone< or a stick. &f there is nothing to grab hold of< clasp the hands together or bite down on a lip or the tongue. Two rules apply to using the techni'ues that help to resist a phase e1it. 4irst of all< ne9er think that the phase might end and result in a return to the body@ thoughts like this are like programming that immediately send the practitioner to a wakened physical state. !econdly< do not think about the physical body. *oing will also instantly return the practitioner to the body< e9ery time. T)%-.I2U)S A.+ (U1)S 'O( ()SISTI.G 'A11I.G AS1))P %o$#ta$t U$der#ta$di$g of the Po##i ility of 'alli$g A#lee" Most of the time< falling asleep while in the phase can be o9ercome by a constant awareness that sleep is possible and detrimental to a continued phase. 6 practitioner must always consider the probability of falling asleep and actions must be 12(
carefully analy>ed to ensure that they are based on real desires and not on parado1ical notions< which are common to dreams. Periodic A$aly#i# of A:are$e## Periodically asking the 'uestion< A6m & dreamingJB while in the phase helps appraise situations and the 'uality of the actions being performed at any moment. &f e9erything meets the standards of full phase awareness< actions may be continued. 6sked on a regular basis< this 'uestion becomes habit< automatically used while transitioning to the phase state. &f you keep asking this 'uestion regularly< sooner or later it will arise automatically at the moment when you are actually transitioning into a dream. This will then help one to wake up< after which it is possible to continue to remain in a full0fledged phase.. The fre'uency of the 'uestion should be based on a practitioner8s ability to consistently remain in the phase. &f a phase usually lasts fi9e to 12 minutes or more< it is not necessary to ask the 'uestion more than once e9ery 2 minutes@ otherwise< this 'uestion has to be asked fre'uently< literally once a minute< or 5ust a little less often. There is another important rule related to resisting falling asleep? no practitioner should engage or participate in spontaneous e9ents occurring in the phase. 9ents that are not planned or deliberate lead to a high probability of being immersed in the side action< which results in a loss of concentrated awareness. T)%-.I2U)S AGAI.ST A. U.()%OG.I9)+ P-AS) !ince the techni'ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions< they should only be used in those cases when they are indeed re'uired. 7ntil then< one should simply bear them in mind and use them only in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely determine whether or not the practitioner is in the phase when using techni'ues for entering it. 123
-y"er-co$ce$tratio$ !ince the cessation of the phase e1perience may be simulated and no different in terms of perception from a real e1it< differences between the physical world and the phase world must be acti9ely discerned. &n other words< a practitioner must know how to determine whether a genuine phase e1it has occurred. 6t present< only one e1periment is known to guarantee an accurate result. The phase space cannot withstand prolonged close 9isual attention to the minute details of ob5ects. ,ithin se9eral seconds of acute e1amination< shapes begin to distort< ob5ects change color< produce smoke< melt< or morph in other ways. 6fter e1iting the phase< look at a small ob5ect from a distance of four to si1 inches< and remain focused on it for 12 seconds. &f the ob5ect does not change< a practitioner can be assured that the surroundings are reality. &f an ob5ect is somehow distorted or askew< a practitioner knows that the phase is intact. The simplest option is to look at the tip of the finger since it is always close at hand. &t is also possible to take a book and e1amine its te1t. Te1t in the phase will either blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish< or full of incomprehensible symbols. Au?iliary tech$i5ue# There are a 9ariety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a foul. =owe9er< since any situation< any property< or any function can be simulated in the phase< these procedures are not always applicable. 4or e1ample< some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing something that is realistically impossible< and< if a practitioner is in the phase< the impossible action will be possible. The problem with this suggestion is that the laws of the physical world may be simulated in the phase< so flying< passing through walls or telekinesis may not be possible< e9en in the deepest phase. &t has also been suggested that looking at a clock twice in a row may help a practitioner determine whether or not the phase is intact@ allegedly< the clock will display a different time each time it is obser9ed. =ere again< the clock8s display may not change in the phase. Of all the au1iliary procedures< one deser9es mention and works in the ma5ority of cases? searching for differences from 12.
reality in the surroundings. 6lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may be 122E accurately simulated in the phase< it is 9ery rare. Therefore< it is possible to figure out whether a phase is intact by carefully e1amining the room where e9erything is taking place. &n the phase< there will be something e1tra or something will be missing@ the time of day or e9en the season will be different from reality< and so on. 4or e1ample< when 9erifying whether a foul occurred< a room may be missing the table supporting a tele9ision set< or the table may be there< but be a different color. G).)(A1 (U1)S 'O( /AI.TAI.I.G The rules for maintaining the phase deal with resisting all or most of the problems which cause a phase to end. !ome of these rules are capable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times and must be followed. The practitioner should not loo% into the distance) &f faraway ob5ects are obser9ed for a long period of time< a foul may occur< or one may be translocated towards these ob5ects. &n order to look at distant ob5ects without problems< a practitioner has to employ techni'ues for maintaining. 4or e1ample< from time to time the practitioner should look at his hands< rub them against each other< or maintain strong 9ibrations. ?onstant activity) 7nder no circumstances should a practitioner remain passi9e and calm in the phase. The more actions performed< the longer the phase is. The fewer actions # the shorter the phase. &t is enough to pause for thought< and e9erything stops. Flan of action) There should be a clear plan of action consisting of at least 5 tasks to be carried out in the phase at the earliest opportunity. This is necessary for se9eral important reasons. 4irst< the practitioner must not pause in the phase to think about Awhat to do ne1tB< which fre'uently results in a foul. !econd< ha9ing a plan< the practitioner will subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary for staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tasks that ha9e been planned. Third< intelligent and pre0planned actions permit focused ad9ancement 112
of purposeful actions 9ersus wasting phase e1periences on whate9er comes to mind at a gi9en moment. 4ourth< a plan of action creates necessary moti9ation and< conse'uently< pronounced intent to perform the techni'ues to enter the phase. Stopping the +8) The less &nternal *ialogue :&*; and reflection that occurs in the phase< the longer it lasts. 6ll thinking must be concentrated on what is being achie9ed and percei9ed. Talking to oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many thoughts may act as programming in the phase and e9en announcing them internally may introduce alterations< including negati9e ones. 4or e1ample< thinking about the body cause a return to it. The practitioner may also get lost in thought< which will lead to a foul. 6lso< sporadic thoughts usually and 'uite easily cause the practitioner to simply fall asleep. . practitioner #ust try to re-enter the phase after e,periencing a foul) 6lways remember that a typical phase e1perience consists of se9eral repeated entries and e1its. ssentially< in most cases it is possible to re0enter the phase through the use of separation or phase state creation techni'ues immediately after returning to the body. &f the practitioner has 5ust left the phase< the brain is still close to it and appropriate techni'ues may be applied in order to continue the 5ourney. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- /AI.TAI.I.G 4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after it is o9er< although doing so greatly helps to increase number of e1periences had. !taying focused on techni'ues for AmaintainingB instead of performing them as background tasks. $etting distracted by e9ents and dropping phase maintenance techni'ues instead of continually performing what8s needed to maintain the phase. !uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary when the phase appears 9ery deep and stable< e9en though these could be false sensations. 7sing the necessary techni'ues too late. !topping due to uncertainty about further actions< while there must always be a plan. 111
4orgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase without reali>ing it. Recogni>ing the risk of falling asleep must be a primary focus. $etting pulled into e9ents occurring in the phase instead of obser9ing and controlling them from the outside. 4orgetting that techni'ues for AmaintainingB must always be used to remain in as deep a phase as possible< and not 5ust for maintaining any odd state. !topping the use of techni'ues for AmaintainingB during contact with li9ing ob5ects< when the techni'ues must be used constantly. "ounting without the desire to count as high as possible. Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation. Passi9eness and calmness instead of constant acti9ity. 1cessi9e thinking and internal dialogue when these should be kept to an absolute minimum. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( D 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hat is a foulJ 2. ,hat is the minimum duration of the phaseJ ). ,hat do phase maintenance :AmaintainingB; techni'ues counteract besides fouls and falling asleepJ +. ,hy might a practitioner think that the phase has ended when it actually is still in progressJ 5. !hould AmaintainingB techni'ues always be usedJ -. ,hat primary techni'ues work against the occurrence of foulsJ (. =ow can a practitioner hook onto the phaseJ 3. ,hile in the phase< what do thoughts about the body lead toJ .. ,hat 'uestion should be asked in the phase in order to reduce the probability of falling asleepJ 12. ,hat happens to an ob5ect during hyper0concentrationJ 11. =ow else< apart from hyper0concentration< might a practitioner effecti9ely recogni>e a false foulJ 112
12. ,hile in the phase< is it permitted to look into the distance for a long timeJ 1). ,hat is &* and how does the degree of it affect the duration of a phase e1perienceJ 1+. ,hat should a practitioner always do after an inad9ertent return into the bodyJ Ta#!# 1. *uring the ne1t few phases< dedicate yourself to the single goal of maintaining as long as possible< using as many maintaining techni'ues as you can. 2. 4igure out which techni'ues ha9e pro9en the most effecti9e and comfortable for you< so that you may use these later. ). &ncrease the duration of your a9erage phase to at least ) minutes :e9aluated ob5ecti9ely;.
11)
%ha"ter E - Primary #!ill#

T-) )SS).%) O' P(I/A(Y S3I11S ,hen dealing with a fully0reali>ed phase< re'uisite knowledge is not limited to entry techni'ues< deepening and maintenance of the state< translocation< or finding and interacting with ob5ects. &n order to feel comfortable< a practitioner has to master or at least acclimate himself with a whole series of techni'ues to correctly react in any number of situations. 4or e1ample< a practitioner needs to know how to create 9ision< if it is absent. 6ctions including passage through a wall or taking flight in a deep phase do not happen easily< although these actions may be assumed natural occurrences< since the phase e1ists apart from the physical world. &n addition to techni'ues that allow interaction with the physical setting and surroundings of the phase< methods must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a practitioner to consciously and consistently lea9e the phase. 6 practitioner does not ha9e to know all the primary skills by heart< but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of them? emergency return< creation of 9ision< translocation through ob5ects< contact with animate ob5ects< and< for many< skills dedicated to fighting fear will also pro9e e1tremely rele9ant. The final choice of methods that re'uire added focus on the part of the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal e1periences and problems faced while in the phase< since different practitioners often ha9e completely different types of problems. +IS%)(.I.G T-) P-AS) Problems with phase identification during entry often arise at the initial stages of studying the phase. 6 practitioner simply cannot understand whether or not he or she is already in the 11+
phase. This uncertainty can manifest while lying down or while practicing in other postures. &f a practitioner is simply lying down< physically percei9ing his own body< and doing nothing< then it is indeed difficult to determine whether or not he is present in the phase. &t is sufficient to note that there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary< there may be a host of signs and unusual sensations< but they by no means necessarily indicate the onset of the phase. The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is always sol9ed through actions. &f the practitioner is lying down< then standard separation techni'ues may produce indication of phase achie9ement 0 in the ma5ority of cases # since such techni'ues may often be incorrectly performed. &t is possible to perform techni'ues that are only achie9able in the phase state. &f a practitioner stands up and does not recogni>e his surroundings< then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing up in the phase. =owe9er< often based on the obser9ation that Ae9erything is as in realityB< a practitioner may stand up and note that e9erything is in fact Aas in realityB simply because the practitioner is still in ArealityB. &n answer to this dilemma< the phenomenon of hyper0concentration has been pre9iously mentioned in relation to maintaining phase. %y using hyper0concentration< it is always possible to ascertain whether the practitioner is in the phase. =owe9er< as a rule< hyper0 concentration is rarely necessary. Most often< the following signs indicate that separation has occurred in the phase? unusual sensations in the body during mo9ement< e1treme tightness during mo9ement< a strong physical urge to lie back down< dis5ointedness of surroundings< and blurred or complete absence of 9ision. Often< the problem resides in the use of direct techni'ues where the practitioner e1pects fast results and attempts to determine whether the phase has been achie9ed. 6s a principle this should not be done. ,hen using direct techni'ues< the phase manifests itself clearly@ therefore< if an attempt to determine its presence is made< it is an indicator that the phase is 'uite likely still far off. 115
)/)(G).%Y ()TU(.< PA(A1YSIS !tatistics show that in one0third of initial phase e1periences< a practitioner is faced with a degree of fear that forces a return to the body. Periodically< e9en e1perienced practitioners face situations that re'uire an abrupt return to wakefulness. This presents a number of concerns. &n and of itself< returning to the body is almost always unproblematic@ remembering and thinking about the body often suffices and within moments the practitioner is returned to the body from whate9er location in the phase. 6dmittedly< it is ad9isable during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from touching anything. 6s a rule< when these actions are performed< simply standing up in the physical world is all that is re'uired to complete a return@ howe9er< this is not always simply achie9ed. !ometimes after reentering the body< the practitioner suddenly reali>es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of sleep paralysis< or the sensation that the body has been switched off. *uring sleep paralysis< it is impossible to scream< call for help< or e9en mo9e a finger. &n the ma5ority of cases< it is also impossible to open the eyes. 4rom a scientific point of 9iew< this is a case of an abrupt< unnatural interruption of the rapid eye mo9ement :R M; phase of sleep< during which this paralysis is always present< and it can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted. This is where it gets interesting. People in the physical world are accustomed to an important rule? if you wish to achie9e something< then do it< and do it as acti9ely as possible. This rule< though good< is not always applicable to certain conditions linked to the phase< and applies least of all to e1iting the phase. !ometimes e1treme effort makes it possible to break through sleep paralysis and resume mo9ement< though most of these efforts tend to e1acerbate immobility. *ue to the unusual nature of a negati9e situation following a deliberate< fear0induced return to the body< the depth of the phase may greatly increase because of the body8s natural< 11-
protecti9e inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte1@ this results in e9en greater agitation< greater fear. The paralysis grows stronger. This is a 9icious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions< which may e9aporate any desire to practice the phase. &gnorance of correct procedures has led to the widespread opinion that such ad9erse situations may make it impossible to come back from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is< therefore< dangerous to get in9ol9ed with the practice. =owe9er< the solution to this problem rests in 9ery simple actions and procedures that can pre9ent a large number of negati9e e1periences? %om"lete (ela?atio$ &n the section on deepening and maintaining< it was noted that the more acti9e a practitioner is while in the phase< the better. "on9ersely< if there is less acti9ity< the 'uality of the phase declines< allowing for an easy e1it. Thus< in order to lea9e the phase< the practitioner only needs to completely rela1 and ignore any percei9ed sensations< actions< or thoughts. 6 practitioner may also recite a prayer< mantra< or rhyme< since that helps the consciousness to be distracted from the situation more 'uickly. Of course< one needs to calm down and try to get rid of the fear< which in and of itself is capable of keeping such a state going. Periodically< the practitioner should try to mo9e a finger in order to check whether attempts at rela1ation ha9e had an effect. %o$ce$tratio$ o$ a 'i$ger 6 practitioner e1periencing sleep paralysis should try mo9ing a finger or a toe. 6t first this won8t work< but the practitioner has to concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 6fter a little while< the physical finger will begin to mo9e. The problem with this techni'ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start making phantom motions instead of physical mo9ements< which is why an understanding of the difference between the two sensations is necessary< since it is often not 9ery ob9ious. 11(
%o$ce$tratio$ o$ Po##i le /oveme$t# The physiology of sleep paralysis< the phase state< and dreams are such that when the practitioner is in one of these states< some actions are always associated with mo9ements made in the real body. This is true when mo9ing the eyeballs< the tongue< or while breathing. &f the practitioner concentrates attention on these processes< it is possible counteract inhibitions to physical mo9ement@ as a result< a sleep0paraly>ed practitioner will become able to mo9e in reality. (eevaluati$g the Situatio$ 7nder normal circumstances< deliberate e1it from the phase is not the norm. *eliberate e1it is commonly caused by certain fears and pre5udices. &f a practitioner is not able to acti9ate the body using other emergency return techni'ues< a careful consideration the possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are many interesting and useful things that can be e1perienced in the phase. ,hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless fearJ To be fair< it must be noted that emergency e1it techni'ues do not always work. 6s a rule< after a long period of sleep depri9ation< or at the beginning of or in the middle of a night8s sleep< the urge to sleep is so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon. &n this respect< ree9aluating the situation is highly recommended so that a practitioner is able to take ad9antage of the situation 9ersus suffering by it. !leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state by means of indirect techni'ues. By the $ay, %no$ing ho$ to e,it paralysis is i#portant not only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even $ithout the phase for appro,i#ately one-third of the hu#an population at least once in a lifeti#e) +t usually happens "efore or after sleep) 'IG-TI.G ')A( 4ear in the phase is a 9ery common occurrence. The practitioner may e1perience fear at any stage< although it is 113
e1pressed much more clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are 9ery di9erse? a feeling that returning to the body is impossible@ a fear of death@ worrying that something bad is going to happen to the body@ encountering something scary and terrible in the phase@ painful sensations@ o9erly sharp< hyper0realistic sensations. One fear dominates all others? the instinct of self0 preser9ation< which< without any apparent reason< can induce a feeling of absolute horror # a feeling that cannot be e1plained or controlled. 4or a no9ice stricken by insurmountable fear that causes paralysis< there is only one way to gradually o9ercome. ach time a no9ice enters the phase< an attempt should be made to go a step further than the pre9ious time. 4or e1ample< in spite of feeling terrified< the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then mo9e them back to the initial position. The second time< the practitioner should attempt to sit down. The third time< standing up should be attempted. The fourth time< walking around in the phase is ad9ised. Then< after incremental steps toward e1periencing the harmlessness of the phase state< producti9e< calm action may ensue. Interesting fact! Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re#ain there for a long ti#e) Once fears are allayed, a cal#ed practitioner is e,periences increased difficulty $ith entry into the phase) 4or a practitioner who faces periodical fears< reali>ing that there is no real danger encourages progress in practice. 7rges to rapidly return to the body are then made baseless. !ooner or later< calmer thought dominates e9ents in the phase< and fear happens less often. ,hen dealing with momentary fear caused by e9ents in the phase< the simplest solution is to tackle it head0on and follow through to the end in order to a9oid a fear0dri9en precedent. &f a practitioner always runs away from undesirable e9ents< the e9ents will occur more and more fre'uently. &f a practitioner is incapable 11.
of facing fear in the phase< it is best to use the translocation techni'ue to tra9el elsewhere< although this solution only produces temporary relief. %()ATIO. O' 6ISIO. Fision is often a9ailable at the 9ery beginning of a phase< especially when the practitioner uses image obser9ation and 9isuali>ation techni'ues to enter. !ometimes 9ision appears within the first few seconds. Other times< it manifests during the deepening process. =owe9er< there are cases where 9ision is not a9ailable and must be created 'uickly< at any cost. Fision may arri9e as soon as it is thought about< but if this does not occur< a special techni'ue is necessary. To create 9ision< a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si1 inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the grayness or darkness. Peering aggressi9ely and attenti9ely at the minute details of the palms will cause them to appear< much like they are being de9eloped on Polaroid film. 6fter se9eral seconds< 9ision will become clear< and along with the palms< the surroundings will also become 9isible. 7nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened. Fision will appear on its own and will not differ from that of reality and the physical sensation of opened eyes will emerge. &t is possible to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times< e9en without ha9ing opened them at all< since the latter is not needed for creating 9ision. The physical eyelids may be open only while e1periencing a 9ery deep phase. &n a shallow phase< opening the eyes will cause a return to wakefulness. The practitioner must also keep in mind that 9ision should only be created after a complete separation from the body and a subse'uent translocation has been achie9ed. 6ttempting to 9iew the hands during flight or while ho9ering in an unidentified space leads to arbitrary translocation. %O.TA%T *IT- 1I6I.G OBF)%TS 122
Two problems may surface while con9ersing with animate ob5ects in the phase? silence or a return to the body. &n 9iew of the fact that many phase applications are based on contact with people for one purpose or another< it is necessary to understand how to correctly manage contact with li9ing ob5ects. &n order to a9oid a foul :e5ection from the phase into reality;< the elementary rules of AmaintainingB must be obser9ed. 6cti9ely obser9ing the facial features or clothing of a person you want to communicate with. ,hile communicating< the practitioner should constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong 9ibrations by straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni'ues to a9oid becoming absorbed in communication. 6 more comple1 problem is o9ercoming the communicati9e unresponsi9eness of ob5ects in the phase. &n many cases< the speech of an ob5ect is blocked by the internal stress of the practitioner. !ometimes the problem stems from an e1pectation that an ob5ect will not be able to communicate in the phase. &t is important to treat the ob5ects in a calm manner. There is no use trying to shout or beat the ob5ect to force communication. On the contrary< it is much more effecti9e to treat the ob5ect gently< without applying pressure. *o not peer at an ob5ect8s mouth< e1pecting sounds to emerge. &t is better to look elsewhere@ taking a passi9e interest in communication generally yields the best results. 6s a rule< the first time that communication with a li9ing ob5ect is successful< future attempts go unhindered. "ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different than those used in ordinary life? talking< facial e1pressions< gesturing with the hands< body language. Telepathy is not necessary. ()A+I.G Reading te1t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of difficulties. 4irst< small print becomes illegible because the affects of hyper0concentration may distort te1t. This problem is sol9ed by using large0font te1tual sources of information. 4or 121
e1ample< the te1t of a normal book blurs when obser9ed too attenti9ely< but the large font on the co9er of a book is easily read since its si>e is sufficient for rapid reading without detailed scrutiny. The second problem encountered while reading in the phase is when te1t is legible but is completely meaningless in composition@ gibberish. This problem is sol9ed by turning o9er the pages< looking for a readable message. &t is also possible to find another copy or create it anew using the ob5ect0finding techni'ues. The same applies to cases where the te1t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols or signs. ,hile reading in the phase< the practitioner should not forget about performing AmaintainingB techni'ues to pre9ent a foul by becoming too rela1ed. 6IB(ATIO.S The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual sensation that may be used successfully to enter< deepen or maintain the phase. &t is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a hea9y current passing through the entire body without causing any pain. &t may also feel like the whole body is contracting< or a tingling sensation similar to numbness. Most often< the sensations are similar to high0fre'uency 9ibrations of the body< which e1plains the origin of the term A9ibrationB. &f the practitioner is not sure whether or not he e1perienced 9ibrations< then there is a good method to sol9e his problem? if he really did< he will not ha9e any doubts about it. &n all other cases< when there are doubts and uncertainty< the practitioner is definitely not dealing with 9ibrations< or is dealing with another form thereof. &f you ha9e e1perienced 9ibrations at least once< the recollection of these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of indirect techni'ues. They are created< supported and strengthened by straining the brain or tensing the body without using the muscles. 4or 9ibrations to appear< it often suffices merely to think about them. *uring the first e1perience< one should e1periment with them for a while by rolling them 122
around the body and its parts< as well as strengthening and weakening them. 5o$ever, one should not thin% that the presence of vi"rations is a necessary condition for "eing in the phase) Many no9ices often stri9e not for the phase but for 9ibrations< after which the former must supposedly follow. That should not be the case. There are indeed specific techni'ues that make it possible to get into the phase by creating 9ibrations< but in all other cases they are not necessary and some practitioners may ne9er ha9e them at all. T)%-.I2U)S 'O( T(A.S1O%ATI.G T-(OUG- OBF)%TS &n a deep phase< the properties of the surrounding en9ironment become 9ery similar to the physical world. =owe9er< it may sometimes be necessary to pass through a wall or translocate to a9oid a physical barrier in the phase. There are two basic options for passing through barriers like walls. 7sually< mastering these re'uires se9eral attempts. Interesting fact! +f a practitioner concentrates on the physical sensations associated $ith passing through a $all, it is possi"le to get stuc%) . practitioner #ay even e,perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing $hen this happens) .t such a ti#e it is necessary to return to the "ody) (a"id +efocu#ed Pe$etratio$ Run or 5ump at a wall with a burning desire to penetrate it. *on8t focus on the wall@ instead concentrate on the immediate surroundings. *o not try to take anything from the current location since this may impede a successful passage through the wall.
12)
The %lo#ed )ye# Tech$i5ue ,hen approaching a wall< the practitioner must close his eyes and completely focus on a desire to pass through it while imagining that the wall does not e1ist< or that it is transparent and penetrable. !urface resistance should be pressed through< continuing on with the aggressi9e desire and concentration. '1IG-T Taking flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past dreams of flight. /othing needs to be tensed< no word need to be said. 6ttempting flight with closed eyes produces a high rate of success< but presents an increased probability of inad9ertent translocation. &f a flight attempt is unsuccessful< a practitioner may try 5umping from a high ele9ation or from a window. The natural instinct of dream flight takes o9er and the fall becomes a controlled flight. =owe9er< 5umping from windows or other ele9ations is ad9isable only to practitioners with e1perience< since no9ices may not always be able to determine whether they are in the phase or in reality. 6nother way to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air when 5umping up. SUP)(-ABI1ITI)S The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical world. &t is important to remember that only a practitioner8s apprehension places limits on what may be done in the phase. 4or e1ample< if a practitioner needs to get to a location 0 e9en 9ery far away 0 it may be reached by teleportation. &f an ob5ect needs to be mo9ed from one side of the room to the other< it may be mo9ed by telekinesis. One of the ma5or benefits of the phase e1perience is unencumbered freedom of action. To master unusual abilities< only a few phases need to be spent in concentrated de9elopment of the methods. 12+
Tele!i$e#i# &n order to learn telekinesis :mo9ing ob5ect by thought;< the practitioner concentrate on an ob5ect while e1periencing a deepened phase< and attempt to mo9e the ob5ect by thinking about the mo9ement. The only re'uired action is aggressi9e 9isuali>ation of the ob5ect8s mo9ement. /o specific e1ternal actions are re'uired. Telekinetic ability is inherent to e9ery human being. &f attempts are unsuccessful at first< press on. %efore too long< the full effect of the practitioner8s will yield results. 7sing this ability helps to encourage a good phase e1perience by pro9iding a tool for carrying out planned tasks. Pyro!i$e#i# &gniting an ob5ect in the phase 5ust by staring at it re'uires a strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob5ect. Performed successfully< an ob5ect will smoke< distort< darken and then burst into flames. Tele"athy To de9elop telepathy in the phase< it is necessary to peer at animate ob5ects while listening surrounding e1ternal and internal sounds with the intention of hearing thoughts e1pressed by thought. 9en e1perienced practitioners encounter difficulty while de9eloping telepathy< but when successful< contact with people in the phase is substantially simplified. 7sing telepathy< discerning the thoughts of people< animals< and ob5ects is possible. =owe9er< this should not be taken too seriously< since it is merely the nature of the phase to simulate what is e1pected. Tra$#mutatio$ Transforming an ob5ect8s form re'uires the techni'ue of transmutation :refer to "hapter .;. &t should also be noted that if the goal is not to con9ert something but rather to transform oneself< then it is necessary to use the translocation techni'ues :also described in "hapter .;< whereby attention has to be concentrated not on the desired place but on the desired form. =ere again there are no limitations apart from indi9idual courage 125
and fantasy. &t is possible to become a butterfly or a dinosaur. &t is possible to become a bird or a worm. &t8s e9en possible to become a child or a person of the opposite se1. These are not simply e1ternal changes< but real transmutations< within and without. &f a practitioner becomes a butterfly< it accompanies the sensation of ha9ing wings< many legs< and an unusual body. The practitioner will intuiti9ely know how to control each part of this new body. This is a superficial description of the transmutation e1perience< which ob9iously defies a customary understanding of reality. T-) I/PO(TA.%) O' %O.'I+).%) 6 crucial factor in de9eloping phase abilities is self0 confidence in the ability to use the skills. &nitially< these abilities are absent because the human brain< tuned in to ordinariness< blocks confidence in the ability to do anything unusual. 6s soon as strong confidence is reached in the performance of phase abilities< all others become easy to achie9e. 6lthough confidence in phase abilities may grow strong< practitioners should remain soundly aware that abilities in the phase are limited to the phase. 6ttempting telekinesis< pyrokinesis< or transmutation in the real world is a waste of time and energy. %O.T(O11I.G PAI. 6long with all the positi9e e1periences and sensations that may be en5oy in the phase< painful e1periences nature may also manifest. Punching a wall in a deep phase state will cause the same pain as if a wall had been struck in physical reality. !ome actions in the phase may una9oidably cause unpleasant feelings of pain@ therefore< it is necessary to know how to a9oid painful actions. 4ocusing on an internal confidence that pain will not result from an action will alle9iate the problem. 6 practitioner may e1periment with this type of focus by pummeling a wall while resol9ing that there is no pain. &f the e1periment succeeds< then obtaining the same result will ne9er 12-
again re'uire the same le9el of effort@ thinking that the phase is painless will suffice. /O(A1 STA.+A(+S I. T-) P-AS) 4rom the 9ery beginning< it should be understood that the moral compass of phase space has nothing in common with the properties and laws in the physical world that promulgate reality. The phase space seemingly imitates the physical world with all its properties and functions only because we are used to percei9ing it and are not e1pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the place where these ha9e been. &t does not make sense to follow the same rules while in the phase. The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the phase because some would be unacceptable< improper< or bad in the real world. These are merely beha9ioral patterns that are unfounded in the world of the phase< where e9erything operates on the basis of entirely different laws. The only moral rules that might e1ist in the phase are those that the practitioner establishes. &f desired< complete< unhindered freedom may be e1perienced. STU+YI.G POSSIBI1ITI)S A.+ S).SATIO.S /o9ice practitioners should not immediately rush towards a single specific goal if long0term practice is desired. &t is better to e1tensi9ely in9estigate the phase and its surroundings before focusing on accomplishment. This will build intimacy with the e1perience and allow unhindered entry and interaction with the phase. 6s in reality< learning whate9er first re9eals itself is the key to increasing and speciali>ing knowledge. 6 beginning practitioner should at first en5oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase< then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase< a practitioner should e1plore it< e1amining and interacting with e9erything encountered. =e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the phase in order to fully understand how unusual the phase is 12(
in its realism. 6 practitioner must e1perience mo9ement? walking< running< 5umping< flying< falling< swimming. Test the sensations of pain by striking a wall with a fist. The simplest way to e1perience taste sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat e9erything that you find there< at the same time not forgetting to smell each item. ,alk through the walls< translocate< create and handle ob5ects. 1plore. 6ll these actions are 9ery interesting in and of themsel9es. The possibilities really are infinite. =owe9er< only when they are well understood and thoroughly e1plored can it be said that the practitioner really knows what the phase is about. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- P(I/A(Y S3I11S ,hen trying to discern whether or not a phase is intact< a 5udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical en9ironment. &n the phase< physical attributes are simulations. =yper0concentrating on an ob5ect for too short a time while trying to determine whether the surroundings are in the phase or in the physical world. *eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely when the entire natural length of the phase should be taken ad9antage of. Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm< rela1ed action. Refusal to practice the phase because of fear< though this problem is temporary and resol9able. Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this fre'uently leads to a foul. Premature attempts to create 9ision in the phase< whereas separating from the body and deepening should occur. 1cessi9e haste while creating 9ision although in the ma5ority of cases 9ision appears naturally. ,hile concentrating on the hands to create 9ision< doing so at an e1cessi9e distance 9ersus the recommended four to si1 inches. 4orgetting about the techni'ues for AmaintainingB while in contact with li9ing ob5ects.
123
4orgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing 9ision when translocating through walls or other solid ob5ects. *esiring to do something superhuman in the phase without the re'uired internal desire and confidence. 4ear of e1periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to control it. Obser9ing moral standards in the phase when they do not apply. 6 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical instead of first thoroughly e1ploring and interacting with the surroundings. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( E 2ue#tio$# 1. 6re there skills in the phase that must first be mastered before the phase may be used to its full e1tentJ 2. &s it possible to understand whether a phase is intact by attempting to flyJ ). =as a practitioner most likely gotten up in the phase or in reality if there are doubts about thisJ +. &s it sufficient to think about the body in order to return to it< and is it only re'uired to return into the body in order to control itJ 5. ,hich arm should be acti9ely and aggressi9ely mo9ed to o9ercome sleep paralysisJ -. &s it possible to tell 5okes to oneself to o9ercome sleep paralysisJ (. &s it possible to mo9e the physical eyes while in the phaseJ 3. ,hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be o9ercomeJ .. "an sleep paralysis occur without practicing the phaseJ 12. ,hat if fear is not addressed and con'ueredJ 11. &s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to o9ercome fearJ 12. &s there cause for fear of anything in the phaseJ 12.
1). 6t what point can 9ision be created in the phase by opening the eyelids and not through the use of special techni'uesJ 1+. ,hat would happen with an attempt to open the eyes after sitting up in bed< i.e.< before becoming completely separated from the phaseJ 15. ,hy may contact with li9ing ob5ects in the phase cause a return to the bodyJ 1-. ,hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth of a talking ob5ectJ 1(. &n the phase< how 'uickly can small te1t be readJ 13. ,hich is easier to read in the phase? te1t in a newspaper or te1t on a large billboardJ 1.. &s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te1t while reading in the phaseJ 22. &s it possible to burst through a wall after running up to it with the eyes shutJ 21. ,hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying in the phaseJ 22. 6re there any e1trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the phaseJ 2). "an a practitioner transform into a ball while in the phaseJ 2+. =ow does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical worldJ 25. !hould a practitioner gi9e up a seat to an elderly person while in the phaseJ 2-. *ue to moral considerations< what is prohibited in the phaseJ Ta#!# 1. *uring your ne1t phase session< walk around your home in9estigating the rooms< kitchen< and bathroom in detail. 2. Dearn to pass through walls. "ompletely dedicate one long phase e1perience to perfecting this skill. ). Dearn to fly in the phase. +. ,hile in a deep phase< learn to control pain by hitting a wall with your fist. 1)2
5. ,hile in the phase< learn telekinesis :the ability to mo9e ob5ects by thought; and pyrokinesis :setting ob5ects on fire< also performed by thought;. -. *edicate a lengthy phase e1perience to an e1periment with 9ision? create it if it is not already a9ailable< and then shut your eyes and recreate 9ision. *o this at least ten times o9er the course of a single phase (. $et ob5ects in the phase to start talking. 3. *edicate a long phase to searching for different kinds of te1ts in order to e1periment with reading 9arious si>e fonts.
1)1
%ha"ter G - Tra$#locatio$ a$d 'i$di$g O Hect#

T-) )SS).%) O' T(A.S1O%ATIO. A.+ 'I.+I.G OBF)%TS Dike e9eryday reality< the phase space cannot be used for certain purposes if it is not known how to mo9e around and find necessary things. &n a wakeful state< it is more or less known where something is located and how to reach it. &n the phase the same assumptions cannot apply since phase mechanisms work by different principles. The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob5ects in the same chapter is because both techni'ues rely on the same mechanics that make the e1istence of these techni'ues possible. &n other words< the same methods 0 with minor e1ceptions 0 can be applied to both translocation and finding. 6fter studying the techni'ues described in this chapter< a practitioner in the phase will be able to go to any location and find any ob5ect. The only limitations that e1ist are those of the imagination and desire@ if these are unlimited< so are the possibilities. Regarding translocation< attention should not be focused on methods for tra9elling through nearby spaces. 4or e1ample< a practitioner may simply walk into an ad5acent room< or out to the street 9ia the corridor or through the window. These are natural< easy actions. 6 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on how to mo9e to remote destinations that cannot be 'uickly reached by physical means. &t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for translocation. !ometimes< due to a lack of e1perience< a practitioner may mistake the phase for reality< and reality may be 1)2
mistaken for the phase. Mistaking the phase for reality implies no danger since a practitioner simply belie9es that an entry attempt was unsuccessful. =owe9er< if reality is mistaken for the phase< a practitioner may perform dangerous or e9en life0threatening actions. 4or e1ample< after getting out of bed in a wakeful state< thinking that e9erything is happening in the phase< a beginner may approach a window and 5ump out of it< e1pecting to fly< as is customary in the phase. 4or this reason alone< shortcuts to flight should only be taken after gaining a le9el of e1perience that makes it possible to unambiguously distinguish the phase from a wakeful state. &f a glitch occurs when practicing translocation techni'ues :for e1ample< landing in the wrong place;< a practitioner should simply repeat the techni'ue until the desired result is obtained. ither way< initial training is a must in order to make e9erything easier for you later on. 6s far as ob5ect0finding techni'ues are concerned< these are used for both inanimate and animate ob5ects. &n other words< these techni'ues are e'ually effecti9e for finding< for e1ample< a person or a utensil. =owe9er< there are se9eral techni'ues that are only suitable for finding li9ing ob5ects. BASI% P(OP)(TY O' T-) P-AS) SPA%) 6ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary law? the degree of changeability of the phase space is in9ersely proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob5ects. That is< the deeper and more stable the phase< the more difficult it is to perform something unusual in it because in a deep< stable phase< the laws of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical world.
1))
6ll translocation and finding ob5ects techni'ues are based on the knowledge of methods that bypass the primary law. The secret lies in the fact that not only phase depth affects the controllability of the phase< but so does phase stability< which in turn depends to a large e1tent on the number of sensations e1perienced in the phase. The techni'ues for translocation and finding ob5ects are used when these e1perienced sensations are weakened through certain actions. &n other words< if a practitioner located in the phase holds a red pencil and e1amines it< tactile and 9isual perceptions are engaged< which under sharp agitation cause the ob5ect to e1ist in its complete form. =owe9er< as soon as the eyes are shut< the stability of pencil image weakens. &n this situation< it will be enough for the practitioner :after sufficient training; to concentrate on belie9ing that the pencil is dark0blue in order for it to appear dark blue after opening the eyes. This phenomenon occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer determined by perceptual areas of the brain and< therefore< it is possible to change it. &f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitioner8s eyes are shut< and there is concentration on a thought that the pencil is no longer on the table< then after opening the eyes< the 1)+
practitioner will find that the pencil has disappeared. &n essence< when the pencil is lying on the table and the practitioner8s eyes are closed< and the pencil is not being held< no perception is being in9ested in the pencil< which the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.
7sing certain techni'ue0related methods< a practitioner may cause the stability of the phase state to remain in flu1 using techni'ues that best suit the practitioner8s indi9idual personality. T)%-.I2U)S 'O( T(A.S1O%ATIO. Tra$#locatio$ through Tele"ortatio$ This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni'ues that beginners should use right away. To apply it< shut the eyes :if 9ision is present;< and then concentrate attention on a thought0 form or image of a location elsewhere in the phase. 6t this moment< there will be a string sensation of swift flight and within two to 12 seconds< the destination will be reached. The success of this techni'ue depends on a strong concentration upon a single goal? the desired location. Practice must be performed 9ery clearly< confidently< aggressi9ely< and without distractions. 6ny unrelated thoughts ha9e a profoundly negati9e influence on the performance of this techni'ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight< cause a foul< or result in arri9ing at an undesired location. 1)5
Tra$#locatio$ through a +oor &n order to use this techni'ue< approach any door with the strong belief that it leads to the re'uired location. 6fter opening the door< the practitioner will see and be able to step into the destination. &f the door was originally open< it must be completely shut before applying the techni'ue. 6 drawback to this techni'ue is that its practice always re'uires a door. &f there is no door< users of this translocation techni'ue should create one using an ob5ect finding techni'ue. Tra$#locatio$ through Tele"ortatio$ :ith the )ye# O"e$ This techni'ue is difficult because it re'uires an unstable phase space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location. *uring teleportation by teleportation with eyes shut< the practitioner disengages from the current location. ,hereas during teleportation by flight with eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the current location< that is not the case here. Therefore< this techni'ue should be used only by e1perienced practitioners who are confident that they are capable of remaining in the phase. 6s far as implementing the techni'ue is concerned< the practitioner simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already present in the desirable location and focus on its image. &t is important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought. !urrounding space will dim< blur and then disappear during this time< and then the intended location will gradually start to appear. The rate of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach the re'uired location. &f concentration is weak or phase depth is poor< then after space destabili>es< it may not be restored 0 and a return to the wakeful state will occur. Tra$#locatio$ :ith %lo#ed )ye# This is one of the easiest techni'ues. To use this techni'ue< the practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha9e an intense desire that< when the eyes are ne1t opened< the re'uired 1)-
location will be reached. &n order to considerably increase the effecti9eness of this techni'ue< it would be useful to imagine< at the moment you close your eyes< that you ha9e already reached the desired location. Translocation must occur then< and it has to happen without the flight sensations that occur during teleportation with closed eyes. Translocation must occur right then< and it has to happen without the flight that occurs in teleportation with closed eyes< which must be a9oided. Tra$#locatio$ y %o$ce$tratio$ o$ a (emote O Hect To perform this techni'ue< the practitioner should peer from a distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an intention to see an ob5ect8s detail< the 'uicker the arri9al at the ob5ect8s location. 6 drawback to this techni'ue is that this type of translocation is possible only for places that are already 9isible< albeit from a great distance. Tra$#locatio$ duri$g Se"aratio$ The simplest way to translocate is to do so while separating from the body. mploying this techni'ue is e1tremely simple and 9ery con9enient. &t may be combined with almost any separation techni'ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a desired location during the initial stages of e1iting the body. &t is e9en better to imagine that phase entry will occur and separation will complete in a chosen location. Interesting fact! .fter having changed his place of residence, the practitioner $ill very often continue for so#e ti#e to separate fro# the "ody in the sa#e house $here he $as used to doing this previously) 6 drawback of this techni'ue is that separation occurs only in the beginning of the phase e1perience and< therefore< can only be used once. Other options should be considered after the first translocation. 1)(
Tra$#locatio$ y Pa##i$g through a *all This techni'ue is performed by walking or flying through a wall with the eyes shut and a firm con9iction that the re'uired location is behind the wall. The barrier does not necessarily ha9e to be a wall. &t can be any non0transparent ob5ect through which a practitioner may walk or fly? a screen< a wardrobe< and so on. The main drawback of this techni'ue is the necessity of appropriate skills for penetrating through solid ob5ects of the phase. 6nother necessary condition for applying this techni'ue is the presence of barriers to pass through. Tra$#locatio$ through +ivi$g This techni'ue is identical to passing through walls with the only difference being instead of a wall 0 which may not always be a9ailable 0 the practitioner will use the floor or the ground. The practitioner must di9e headfirst with the eyes shut and ha9e complete confidence that the re'uired location is underneath the solid surface. The ability to pass through solid ob5ects is< naturally< also re'uired. 6 practitioner may di9e through the floor or the ground< and also into any flat hori>ontal surface? a table< a chair< a bed< and so forth. Tra$#locatio$ through (otatio$ 6pply this techni'ue< a practitioner in the phase will to start rotating on an a1is while simultaneously concentrating on a belief that a desired location will be reached once rotation is stopped. The eyes must be shut during the rotation< or 9ision must not be focused on anything in particular. 6s a rule< two to fi9e re9olutions on an a1is are sufficient. Once again< e9erything depends on the ability to fully concentrate on a desired goal without any distractions. OBF)%T 'I.+I.G T)%-.I2U)S Tech$i5ue of Tra$#locatio$ 1)3
6ll translocation techni'ues are also applicable to ob5ect finding techni'ues since the use of both techni'ues re'uires altering the surrounding the space. &nstead of concentrating on a location< the practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be found or changed. 6s a result< finding the necessary ob5ect :pro9ided this techni'ue has been mastered; is guaranteed< but maintaining the original location where the action begins is not guaranteed. &f the goal is to find an ob5ect while remaining in the present location< use the speciali>ed techni'ues described later on? techni'ues that change only a portion of the phase space. 'i$di$g y %alli$g a .ame This techni'ue is only used to find li9ing ob5ects. The practitioner must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phase resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud< nearly a shout< otherwise it will not always work. $enerally< it is often enough to pronounce a name se9eral times to achie9e results. &f the desired animate ob5ect does not ha9e a name or the practitioner does not know it< then any name or general summoning will do< like< A"ome hereMB This should be done while mentally focusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal. 'i$di$g y I$5uiry To perform this techni'ue< approach any person in the phase and ask him :or her; where to 'uickly find a desired ob5ect. 6n accurate answer is usually gi9en straight away< and it should be followed. =owe9er< to a9oid wasting time< do not forget to mention that the ob5ect must be found A'uicklyB< or specify that the ob5ect should be AnearbyB. *uring this communication< under no circumstances should there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information< since otherwise it may lead to a simulation of what is e1pected. The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the presence of an animate person and good skill at communicating with ob5ects in the phase< which can pro9e difficult. 1).
'i$di$g y Tur$i$g Arou$d &n order to use this techni'ue< the practitioner must concentrate and imagine that the re'uired ob5ect is located somewhere behind his back< and after turning around he will actually see it there< e9en if it was not there 5ust a moment earlier. This works best if the practitioner< prior to turning around< did not 9iew the place where the ob5ect is e1pected to appear. 'i$di$g Arou$d a %or$er ,hen approaching any corner< concentrate and imagine the re'uired ob5ect is 5ust around the corner. Then< after turning the corner< the ob5ect will be found. 6nything that limits space 9isibility may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha9e to be the corner of a house or another type of building@ it could be the corner of a wardrobe< the corner of a truck< etc. The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the a9ailability of a sufficiently large corner that blocks the 9iew of anything around the other side of it. 'i$di$g i$ the -a$d This techni'ue is< in essence< only applicable to finding ob5ects that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni'ue< concentrate on the idea that the ob5ect is already in hand. 6t that moment< the practitioner must not look at it. !oon after beginning to concentrate on this idea< the practitioner will at first feel a slight sensation of the ob5ect lying in his hand< followed by a full sensation and appearance of the desired ob5ect. 'i$di$g y Tra$#mutatio$ This techni'ue distorts the phase space while not completely disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must gi9e strong attention to a thought that a re'uired ob5ect is going to appear in a desired location. There must be sufficient confidence that the practitioner8s desires will be reali>ed. 6t this moment< the process of metamorphosis will begin? space will distort and dim< and the re'uired ob5ect will begin to manifest itself. 6fter this< brightness and focus will be 1+2
restored with necessary alterations made present in the phase space. This techni'ue is relati9ely difficult to perform in comparison to others< and< therefore< it is better to use it only after a high le9el of e1perience has been reached because it is difficult to remain in the phase during any metamorphic process. 6s is e9ident in the name of this techni'ue< it can be used to find ob5ects and also create new ob5ects from found ob5ects. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *IT- T(A.S1O%ATIO. A.+ 'I.+I.G OBF)%TS 6pplying translocation and ob5ect finding techni'ues without the precondition of a steady phase. &nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra9el to a location or to find an ob5ect. *oubting that results will be achie9ed instead of ha9ing complete confidence. Passi9e performance of the techni'ues instead of a strong desire and high le9el of aggression. 4orgetting to repeat translocation or ob5ect finding techni'ues when the techni'ue did not work or worked incorrectly during the first attempt. $etting distracted by e1traneous thoughts during the lengthy process of teleporting with eyes shut. Total concentration is re'uired at all times. 6pplying the techni'ue of teleportation with eyes open without ade'uate e1perience. 4ailing to immediately translocate when using the closed eyes techni'ue@ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni'ue. $lossing o9er minute details or only obser9ing the broad features of a remote ob5ect while applying translocation by concentration. 6 delayed desire to mo9e while translocating during separation. 6n instantaneous desire to immediately mo9e is necessary.
1+1
4orgetting to first shut a door completely when using translocation through a door@ otherwise< there will be contact with what is already behind it. 7sing a translocation techni'ue to go through a wall without knowing how to pass through solid ob5ects. Paying too much attention to the process of translocation through a wall@ this leads to being trapped in the wall. 4orgetting to shut the eyes while translocating di9ing headfirst. The eyes should remain closed until after the techni'ue is complete. &nsufficient internal association with an animate ob5ect while finding it by calling its name. Trying to find an ob5ect 9ia interrogation instead of passi9ely communicating with li9ing ob5ects of the phase. 7sing distant corners when applying the techni'ue of finding an ob5ect around the corner. "hoose nearby corners to a9oid wasting precious tra9el time. 6pplying transmutation techni'ues without possessing sufficient e1perience in managing :AmaintainingB; the phase space. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( G 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to translocate in the phaseJ 2. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to find ob5ects in the phaseJ ). ,hat do translocation and finding ob5ects techni'ues ha9e in commonJ +. ,hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by translocation and finding ob5ectsJ 5. =ow may one translocate across 9ery short distancesJ -. ,hen the flight techni'ue by 5umping out of a window be attemptedJ
1+2
(. ,hat should be done if translocation and ob5ect finding techni'ues do not yield the re'uired resultJ 3. &s it possible to find a person from real life using the techni'ue of finding ob5ectsJ .. *oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phaseJ 12. ,hat are the fundamental components of space and ob5ect stabilityJ 11. =ow large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of spaceJ 12. ,hat is most important while using a teleportation techni'ueJ 1). ,hat does speed of mo9ement depend on during teleportationJ 1+. !hould a no9ice apply the techni'ue of teleportation with open eyesJ 15. ,hat techni'ue might the translocation with closed eyes techni'ue turn intoJ 1-. !hould large or small details be scrutini>ed while translocating by concentration on remote ob5ectsJ 1(. &s the techni'ue of translocation during separation applied after separation or while beginning to separateJ 13. ,hen applying the techni'ue of translocation through a door? is it better if the door is open or closedJ 1.. ,hy might translocation by passing through a wall failJ 22. ,hen using translocation by di9ing< is it important to be in a place where there is something to stand onJ 21. ,hile applying the techni'ue of rotation< should rotation be imagined or realJ 22. &s it possible to use a translocation techni'ue to attempt finding ob5ectsJ 2). ,hen using the techni'ue of calling by name< what should be done if the name of a desired person in the phase is unknownJ 2+. ,hile looking for an ob5ect using the method of in'uiry< is it important to specify that the ob5ect needs to be found A'uicklyBJ 25. =ow far back must a turn occur when the techni'ue of finding ob5ects by turning is being usedJ 1+)
2-. ,ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the techni'ue of finding ob5ects around the cornerJ 2(. &s it necessary to shut the eyes while using the transmutation techni'ueJ Ta#!# 1. *edicate the ne1t three phases to e1periments with translocation techni'ues< using all of them and tra9elling where9er you want. 2. 6fter e1periencing three phases dedicated to translocation< select the techni'ues that work best for you. ). *uring the ne1t phase< tra9el to the iffel Tower< to the Moon< and to the homes of some of your relati9es. +. *edicate the ne1t three phases to e1periments with the full range of techni'ues for finding ob5ects< including translocation techni'ues. 5. 6fter three phases dedicated to finding ob5ects< select the techni'ues that you are most comfortable with. -. &n the ne1t phase that you e1perience< find your mother< and then at the same location locate this te1tbook< a red globe< and a green rose.
1++
%ha"ter 10 - A""licatio$
(ou have in front of you a concise description of the phase-s practical applications, al"eit in condensed for# as full treat#ent of the topic re9uires #uch #ore than a single chapter) . #uch #ore detailed description of $ays to practically apply the phase, along $ith techni9ues for doing so, are contained in the "oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 2 12 Transfor#ation*) +t also provides #any e,a#ples of the pheno#enon in practice) T-) )SS).%) O' APP1I%ATIO.S 'O( P-AS) STAT)S Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and 9ariety of e1perience that the practitioner is often not concerned with the 'uestion of how the phase might be purposefully used. The critical 'uestion of application becomes e9en more critical as e1perience increases. 6pplication of the phase becomes more 9i9id against the background of understanding how the phenomenon can pro9ide a means of gaining information and new e1periences. !ome approach the phase practice with a predetermined goal< uninterested in anything else. ,ith a specific goal< a problem may arise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is wrapped in a thick layer of pre5udices and stereotypes< which often ha9e no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter is to precisely separate reality from fiction. &ts second purpose is to pro9ide a detailed description of what may be obtained from the practice of phase e1periences. 1+5
9ery pro9en and accessible practical application of the phase is based on three 'ualities? a; application founded on the phase8s ability to simulate any ob5ect and any space with any properties and functions@ b; application based on the opportunity to connect with the subconscious mind in order to obtain information@ c; application based on the phase8s ability to impact a practitioner8s physiology. Most importantly< nothing described in this chapter is difficult to achie9e. 6ny application may be achie9ed during the 9ery first phase if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate techni'ues for translocation or finding ob5ects. Regardless of whether the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic world9iew< a full range of access is inherently possible. Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e1ceed the scope of descriptions related through this chapter. &t is possible that other applications simply ha9e not been pro9en yet< and< so far< the correct methods of practicing these unknown. Only the practitioner may determine the limits of possibility within the phase. Of course< common sense should be applied< or it would be logically and psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of this chapter is to provide a real Cthough #ini#al0 foundation that is fir# and unyielding, $hatever the circu#stance) +f the practitioner follo$s a strict approach to practice, it $ill "e #uch #ore difficult to "eco#e lost during further practical and theoretical studies) APP1I%ATIO.S BAS)+ O. SI/U1ATIO. Many wonder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the brain< i.e. whether or not the phase is all in one8s head. %ut in the conte1t of applying the phase< this is not a 9alid concern. Perception of the entire physical en9ironment is performed through sensory organs. &n the phase< perception is the same< sometimes e9en more realistic. ,hether e9erything described in this chapter occurs in reality or is merely simulated makes no difference in terms of the encountered sensations. Travelli$g 1+-
.round the $orld/ &t is possible to reach any point of the planet< and it is particularly interesting to re9isit places where the practitioner once li9ed or 9isited< and 9isit places that the practitioner has a strong desire to 9isit. 9ery sight and beauty of the arth become accessible< be it the iffel Tower or an island in Oceania< the Pyramids of gypt< or 6ngel 4alls. Through Outer Space? 6lthough humankind is not going to reach Mars any time soon< any practitioner may stand on its surface and e1perience its uni'ue landscape through the use of translocation in the phase. There is nothing more ama>ing than obser9ing gala1ies and nebulae< planets< and stars from the 9antage pint of 9ast space. Of all phase applications a9ailable< this one pro9ides practitioners with the most striking aesthetic e1periences. To different places in ti#e/ This makes it possible to 9isit a childhood< to see what a person will look like in the future@ a pregnant woman in the phase may see what her child will look like. Tra9el far back in time and witness the construction of the Pyramids at $i>a< see Paris in the 1(th century< wander among the dinosaurs of the Lurassic period. Through different $orlds/ Tra9el a world that has been described in literature or 5ust in9ented by the practitioner< de9eloped in the imagination. These could be e1traterrestrial ci9ili>ations< parallel worlds< or uni9erses from fairy tales and films. 6ny destination is nearby. )$cou$ter# :ith relatives/ !ince relati9es cannot always see each other< there is the remarkable possibility to meet each other and talk in the phase. Of course< this does not entail mutual presence. &t is enough for one person to possess the re'uired desire 0 the second person may ne9er e9en know. Reali>ing the desire to contact a close relati9e and e1change information is a treasure. :ith ac9uaintances/ "ircumstances often pre9ent seeing people who are important. This is an opportunity to reali>e a desire and finally meet that certain person again.
1+(
:ith the dead/ Regardless of the nature of the phase phenomenon< nothing else yields the possibility to see< talk to< and embrace a deceased lo9ed one. These are 9i9id< personal e1periences< accessible to e9eryone< and achie9ing these encounters does not re'uire ma5or difficulty. "ourage is the only necessity. 4rom a techni'ue0related point of 9iew< a stable phase and application of the finding ob5ects techni'ue sets the stage for what at first may seem impossible. &t should be noted that when a deceased person is encountered in the phase< the distortions caused by the ob5ect finding techni'ue may lead to some 9ery undesirable occurrences. &f you are interested in this sub5ect< you should carefully study the guidebook ?ontact $ith the 8eceased :author? Michael Raduga;. :ith cele"rities/ Through the use of ob5ect finding techni'ues< a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous person. This could be a historical persona< a contemporary politician< or an artist. &n the phase state< they are all accessible for any type of interaction. 4or e1ample< a practitioner could meet Lulius "aesar< Lesus "hrist< /apoleon< "hurchill< !talin< =itler< l9is Presley< Marilyn Monroe< and a great many others. (eali>i$g +e#ire# 9eryone has dreams. Regardless of whether they e9er come true in reality< they may at least en5oy be reali>ed in the phase. !ome dream of a 9isit to Das Fegas< some to dri9e a 4errari< some 9isit Outer !pace< others would like to bathe in a pile of money< and some desire se1ual e1periences. 6ll of these may finally be e1perienced in the phase. Alter$ative to the 6irtual *orld &n the phase< young men may participate in game battles as if the battles are real. 6 practitioner can 9isit unusual worlds and places while en5oying completely realistic sensations< feel a weapon in his hands< and e9en the smell of gunpowder. &f desired< e9en the sensation of battle wounds may be e1perienced. $aming possibilities in the phase are not limited by the power of a microprocessor< but the e1tent of a practitioner8s imagination. 1+3
%reative +evelo"me$t ?reating $or%s of art/ 7sing the methods of ob5ect finding or translocation< an artistic practitioner can purposefully seek an ob5ect in the phase that may be composed in real life. &f necessary< it is possible to easily return to study an ob5ect in the phase. 4or e1ample< a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to can9as in the real world while periodically returning to the same landscape in the phase. Gie$ing future co#pleted $or%s of art/ &f an artist is in the process of reali>ing an idea< then a preliminarily look at the end result of a design may be seen in the phase. 6 painter can e1amine a painting in ad9ance@ a sculptor may see a completed sculpture< and an architect will be able to wander through a house that is still in the early stages of design. 6ny creati9e work can be simulated in the phase. . source of inspiration and fantasy/ The phase practice imparts ideas and desires that positi9ely affect creati9e endea9ors. 4urthermore< the reali>ation of desires and tra9els through unusual spaces e9oke great emotions< which pro9ide e1cellent inspiration. APP1I%ATIO.S BAS)+ O. %O.TA%T *IT- T-) SUB%O.S%IOUS /I.+ 6ssume that the phase state is 5ust an e1ceptionally unusual state of brain and that perception within it is no more than an unusually realistic play of its functions. 6ssume that a practitioner in the phase decides to tra9el to a forest. To do so< the translocation with closed eyes techni'ue is used< and< as a result< a forest appears. ,hat happens if the 9ision contains 9ery detailed knowledge of forests< what forests consist of< and where forests originateJ The brain creates a hyper0realistic space superior to that of e9eryday reality< consisting of millions of blades of grass< lea9es< hundreds of trees< and a multitude of sounds. ach blade of grass has depth and build< not 5ust a point. ach leaf also consists of component parts. 6 uni'ue< natural pattern makes up the bark of each tree. 1+.
!uddenly< a wind begins to blow through the forest< and millions of lea9es and blades of grass< following a mathematical model of the propagation of air masses< begin oscillating in a wa9elike fashion. Thus< a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only of creating millions of details in the desired scene< but also to control each of those details indi9iduallyM 9en if the phase is 5ust a state of mind< this does not mean that there are no sources of information within it. The mind possesses great computing ability and is e'uipped to imagine the full e1tent of the impossible. /o computer< howe9er powerful< is capable of similar feats. 6 practitioner is able to somehow tap into ama>ing resources while in the phase. &t only remains to learn e1actly how to achie9e mastery. &t is possible that the phase space is go9erned by the subconscious mind. This means that the practitioner is able to contact the subconscious while in the phase state. *uring e9eryday life< the subconscious mind sends information based on calculations determined by enormous capabilities. =owe9er< humans neither hear nor percei9e these signals because people are accustomed to recei9ing information linguistically. The subconscious mind hardly operates within the limitations of language. "ommunication with the subconscious mind on a conscious le9el is only possible within the phase. &f all phase ob5ects are created and controlled by the subconscious mind< then it is possible to use them as translators. 4or e1ample< when talking to a person in the phase< normal words are heard while the ob5ect and communicated information is controlled by the subconscious mind. 6n e1planation of how information is obtained in the phase can hardly be une'ui9ocally pro9en. Perhaps there are other undisco9ered resources. %ut that is not so important. The most important thing is definitely known? how to obtain information in the phase. The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is not comple1. 6fter entering the phase< only the techni'ues for obtaining information and the methods of 9erifying it need to be learned to increase in knowledge gleaned from the phase. 152
%ased on the pragmatic e1planation of the nature of the phase as an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious< it may be assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is limited. &f the phase e1ists within the confines of the brain< then the brain can only operate on data that has been recei9ed by the brain o9er the course of its e1istence. &ndeed< it appears that e9erything percei9ed through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated with other data@ this obser9ation concern conscious and unconscious perception. &f any e9ent is actually a conse'uence of other e9ents< which were< in turn< also conse'uences of pre9ious happenings< then nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is known 0 then it is possible to calculate what is implied by it. 6s a result< if e9erything is based solely on the resource of the subconscious mind< then information may be obtained about e9erything that is related to an indi9idual life? the practitioner8s e1periences and the e1periences of those with whom the practitioner e1periences life. Dessons are learned from the future and past< and the future and past of others. 6ll in all< in order to approach knowing the whole of the information a9ailable in the phase< personal knowledge capacity would need to increase by 122 or e9en 1<222 times.
151
The only information that is not a9ailable in the phase is that about which the subconscious mind does not ha9e any preliminary information. 4or e1ample< where to purchase a winning lottery ticket that will win millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconscious mind will also not be able to show the practitioner what a random street in a small town on the other end of the arth looks like. 6 practitioner should not try guessing what information the subconscious mind has to offer and what it doesn8t because mistakes are easily made. 4or e1ample< if a practitioner has ne9er been to Paris and ne9er seen the iffel Tower< it might be assumed that the practitioner8s subconscious mind knows nothing about it either< although through o9er the course of life< the mind has already recei9ed an enormous 'uantity of information from pictures< photographs< stories< 9ideos< books< and so forth. There are three basic techni'ues for obtaining information in the phase. ach of them has its ad9antages and disad9antages that must be studied and learned before use. A$imate O Hect# Tech$i5ue< To perform this method of obtaining information< the practitioner< in a full deep phase< must locate a person by techni'ues for finding ob5ects and procure the necessary information from that person through the use of simple 'uestions. &f the re'uired information is linked to a certain person< then that person should be located in the phase. &f the information is not related to anyone in particular< then it is possible to create a uni9ersal information source< which must be associated with wisdom and knowledge. 4or e1ample< this could be a wise recluse< a well0known philosopher< or a guru. The ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it is easy to pose additional 'uestions and it is also easier to 9erify whate9er information is obtained. 6 drawback of this techni'ue is that< for many< it is difficult to communicate with li9ing ob5ects in the phase because of ob5ects8 unresponsi9eness or a practitioner8s problems with maintaining the phase while talking with ob5ects. 152
I$a$imate O Hect# Tech$i5ue< 7se techni'ues for finding ob5ects in order to locate information from sources like inscriptions< books< or newspapers. ,hile trying to locate the source of information< remember to concentrate of a belief that what is found will ha9e the desired information. !ource types are not limited to paper media@ e9en radios or tele9isions may be watched or listened to< and computer search engines and file systems also may produce results. 6 huge drawback of this techni'ue is that considerable complications arise if an additional or a follow0up 'uestion emerges< which may cause the practitioner to ha9e to stop and repeat the searching process. The upside to this techni'ue is that if a practitioner has problems communicating with animate ob5ects< this techni'ue can temporarily ser9e as a reasonable alternati9e. )"i#ode Tech$i5ue< &n order to recei9e information using this method< imagine an e9ent or series of e9ents that will communicate the desired information. Then< mo9e to the area where predetermined e9ents are e1pected to take place by using translocation techni'ues. 6fter arri9ing at the destination< use 9isual obser9ation to understand what is taking place and the information that the e9ents are communicating. The episode techni'ue is suitable only for cases where information can be obtained by obser9ation. 5o$ to verify the infor#ationH The techni'ues for recei9ing information in the phase are not comple1 in and pro9e successful after 5ust a few attempts. =owe9er< as was already mentioned earlier< the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of 9i9id perception are not particularly stable 0 not only in terms of appearance< but also in terms of their properties. "orrectness of information also depends on the ob5ects themsel9es. The problem rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the ob5ect in 'uestion and may recei9e false information. Interesting fact! 15)
The phase space is not everyday realityB therefore, it should not "e treated $ith the nor#al "elief that every o"servation should "e regarded as fact) 9en when a practitioner has learned to find animate and inanimate ob5ects with an absence of doubt< there is still no guarantee that the recei9ed information is always accurate. 6 few techni'ue0related tricks are able to test an ob5ect8s ability to speak the truth. 4or e1ample< an ob5ect can talk about something with absolute confidence< but that does not mean that what it communicates is all true. &f doubt is e1perienced while finding the ob5ect< then doubt may ha9e an effect on what the ob5ect says. This is why doubt must be a9oided at all costs 0 although beginners are bound to initially ha9e problems with this. To determine whether an ob5ect is able to gi9e accurate information< a control 9uestion should be asked@ a 'uestion that the subconscious mind cannot know the answer to. 4or e1ample< a practitioner might ask a found ob5ect? A,here can & buy the winning lottery ticket for the Mega %all 5ackpotJB &f the ob5ect starts answering such 'uestions seriously< going into great detail< then the ob5ect should be created anew since its properties allow the possibility that it will lie. 6 proper ob5ect will remain silent or say that it does not know the answer to the control 'uestion. 6fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control 'uestion< it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying 9uestion. The practitioner needs to ask the ob5ect where the information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the information8s authenticity in the real world. The ob5ect may also be asked the same 'uestions more than once< pro9ided they are reworded. The answers to reworded 'uestions must be identical. Remember< the more important the nature of the information and the more serious action it implies< the more effort needs to be in9ested in 9erifying it in the real world since a certain percentage of the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance of information0related techni'ues. 15+
APP1I%ATIO. BAS)+ O. I.'1U).%I.G P-YSIO1OGY There are three main elements that< with the help of the phase< may influence the physiology in 9ery beneficial ways. 4irst< it is possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn how to influence physiology. !econd< the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than to real e9ents. 4or e1ample< if running while in the phase< the physical processes of the body would be consistent with the processes occurring in the body of a person running in reality? respiration accelerates< blood pressure increases< the heartbeat 'uickens< and e9en blood flow to the feet becomes greater. Third< while the practitioner e1periences profound changes of consciousness in the phase< this is when all direct and indirect forms of autosuggestion are most effecti9e. /ot all influences on physiology are 122E effecti9e. =owe9er< e9en without a guaranteed rate of success< the effort to influence physiology is worthy of attention because ama>ing results can be obtained. 6lways remember that achie9ing a good result may re'uire repeated influence from the phase. 9en in the physical world< medications re'uire repeated ingestion. &f the goal is to cure a disease< do not rely solely on the phase. !ick persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians. The more serious the illness< the more strongly this rule applies. O tai$i$g I$formatio$ The diagnosis of health problems may be performed with the same techni'ues used for obtaining information. &t is also possible to learn methods to cure health problems< if such methods e1ist. %oth of these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the phase. &nformation gathering is the only pro9en way to influence the physiology of other people by using the phase. 4or e1ample< it is possible to find a well0known healer in the phase and ask about personal health problems or the problems of a friend or family member. 6 clarified answer may be used in the assistance of traditional medical treatment. 155
Atte$tio$ from +octor# 4ind a doctor in the phase by using the techni'ue of finding ob5ects and ask the doctor to take e1amine or treat a known illness or other health problem. 4or e1ample< in case of abdominal pains the doctor may palpate the belly< apply pressure to 9arious points< and perform a special massage. 6ny actions are possible< including an operation. 6fter lea9ing the phase< the practitioner will feel a positi9e result. Ta!i$g medici$e# The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousness and are percei9ed directly. Ob5ect locating techni'ues may be used to find medications used to treat e1isting problems. &t is also possible to create self0made substances to produce the desirable effect. 4or e1ample< in case of an acute headache in reality< a practitioner may take a painkiller while in the phase and its effect will be partially felt in the wakeful state. +irect )ffect 6n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the phase. 4or e1ample< a sore throat may be warmed by en9isioning a burning sensation in the throat or by mo9ing to a hot location< like a sauna. &f a practitioner would like to increase physical fle1ibility< then stretching in the phase will cause the body to ad5ust to the none1istent action by rela1ing and tensing the corresponding tendons and muscles. Programmi$g This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto0 training in the phase< which is more potent in the phase than reality. 6 practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and< if possible< should imagine e1periencing the desired result. 4or e1ample< if the aim is to get rid of depression< a practitioner should attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase< e1periencing it to the fullest e1tent possible. !imultaneously< silent repetition of a goal with complete understanding and 15-
e1pectation that e9erything will be alright< that e9erything is wonderful will undoubtedly produce the desired effect. U#eful e?"erie$ce# 9erything with useful properties in reality should be e1perienced as useful in the phase since the body will react in practically the same manner. 7seful e1periences may include e1ercising< going to the gym< ha9ing a massage< taking mud or salt baths< and e1periencing pleasant emotions. P#ychology Practicing phase0related techni'ues fa9orably affects the psychology because it offers new opportunities and e9okes new emotions. =owe9er< there are specific applications of the phase that produce differing psychological effects. 4or e1ample< it is possible to use the phase space as a bridge for dealing with phobias by facilitating a setting where a practitioner may confront and deal with certain fears. Farious comple1es may be defeated in a similar manner. The use of a well0known techni'ue called re0 9isiting :recapitulation;< where a person re0e1periences ad9erse e9ents while trying to relate to them in a new way< has been used successfully in the phase. Trai$i$g 6ny motor skills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at the le9el of interaction between areas of the brain that correspond to muscle action. &n the phase< wrestlers may practice throws< karate fighters may practice punches and kicks< and gymnasts may practice acrobatics. =a9ing enough time to practice these actions in the phase is another matter. U.P(O6). )'')%TS People often approach the practice of 9arious phase states with deep0rooted misconceptions about what can actually be achie9ed through practice. 9erything listed in this section refers to these misconceptions. &t has not been pro9en that any of these 15(
things is impossible@ howe9er< actions should be based on pro9en and 9erified methods in order to a9oid making mistakes and wasting time. Fhysical e,it/ &f the first e1perience with the phase phenomenon happens by accident< it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a real separation of the soul from the body # a physical e1it. This is how the initial phase e1perience really feels. ,ith e1perience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match things in the phase< like the placement of ob5ects or furniture in the house where a phase is first encountered. /o actual physical e1it from the body has e9er been pro9en through scientific e1perimentation and obser9ation. 4or e1ample< in the phase< it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical world< although it may seem so< the locations that are e1perienced are produced within the mind. /or is it possible to pinch someone in the phase and then to find a bruise on the person while in reality. Other $orlds/ The phase space is similar to the physical world< and a practitioner may be inclined to think that the soul has left the body. !ometimes the phase takes on an absolutely unnatural form. 6s a result< the practitioner may decide that a parallel world has been entered? the world beyond< the astral plane< mental space< or the ether. 6lthough tra9el in the phase can lead to many places< this does not mean that the phase allows tra9el through or use of actual< alternate worlds. The practitioner should be reasonable. 8evelop#ent of super-a"ilities/ &t is partially correct to consider the practice of the phase as an e1trasensory ability since it is an actual de9elopment of e1tremely unusual skills that ha9e always been considered mystical. Times ha9e changed< and the phase should hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric< obscure corners of knowledge. There e1ists an unpro9en theory that the practice of the phase can impart unusual abilities. ,hile literature is full of references to this effect< these abilities ha9e not yet been pro9en by anyone. The same applies to intentionally de9eloping unusual abilities in the phase. Oes< these may be trained while in the 153
phase< but this does not mean that training in the phase will yield the same results in the real world. Practice should not be for the sake of achie9ing super0abilities since there are many pro9en applications that do translate to reality in 9aluable ways. %e realistic. US) O' T-) P-AS) BY T-) +ISAB1)+ ,hile practicing the phase may still be 9iewed by the ma5ority as entertainment or an element of self0de9elopment at best< phase practice takes on a whole new meaning for the physically disabled. 4or them< the phase may be the only place where the handicaps of reality dissol9e and disabled practitioners e1perience a range of possibility greater than the life e1perienced in reality. 6 blind person will see again in the phase< e9en more clearly than seeing people do in reality. !omeone who is paraly>ed will be able walk< run< and also fly. 6 deaf person will hear the murmur of streams and the chirping of birds. 4or the disabled< the phase practice is a chance to disco9er new< incomparable worlds free of physical limitation. /aturally< there are some nuances that must be understood. 4irst< for e1ample< if a person was born blind< then there is the 'uestion as to whether or not they would be able to see in the phase the same way ordinary people see. =owe9er< this issue has not been fully studied< and blind people should simply carry out their own independent research. !econd< some types of disabilities can negati9ely affect the practice of the phase states. 4or e1ample< people who ha9e gone blind ha9e greater difficultly catching the intermediate state between sleep and wakefulness since< unlike seeing people< they may awaken without opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third< a purely psychological disability plays an enormous negati9e role. Psychologically disabled people ha9e a whole range of specific beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them. ,hate9er the indi9idual issues< this particular area of phase applications re'uires additional study. &t deser9es significant attention because it is a 9alid tool for the rehabilitation 15.
of the disabled. &t is workable< uni'ue< and e1tremely surprising in terms of the e1periences that it offers. TYPI%A1 /ISTA3)S *-). USI.G APP1I%ATIO.S 6ttempting an applied use of the phase without reaching a good depth. *eepening must always be performed before applications are attempted. %eing so in9ol9ed in phase applications that AmaintainingB techni'ues are forgotten. 4orgetting to consider how to breathe when tra9eling through Outer !pace or underwater< which may lead to asphy1iation. "oncentrating on a certain ob5ect while tra9eling through time instead of concentrating on time tra9el< which should be the focus since it is the point of performing the applications. 4orgetting techni'ues for AmaintainingB when animate ob5ects are encountered when these techni'ues must always be kept in mind. 6n inability to o9ercome fear during contact with deceased people. This fear must be o9ercome once and it will ne9er resurface again. Dimiting desires while practicing the phase. There is no limit to desire within the phase. Dimiting the performance of certain actions< although there are no customary norms of beha9ior in the phase< unless the practitioner decides upon specific limits. ,hile looking for information in the phase< attempting to obtain knowledge which clearly e1ceeds the scope of the subconscious mind. 6pplying the techni'ue of obtaining information from animate ob5ects without knowing how to communicate with them. 4orgetting to check the ability of an ob5ect to con9ey 9alid knowledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is not 9erified. 4ailing to 9erify information in the phase before using it in reality. 1-2
4orgetting to 9erify serious information obtained in the phase in reality before using it. Ferification absolutely must be performed to a9oid using bad information in reality. 6 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. &n the ma5ority of cases< results are gained through repeated effort. 6n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase< whereas it is compulsory to seek medical ad9ice. &nitially belie9ing that the phase is the e1it of the soul from the body< while this is easily refuted in practice. "oncentrating only on unpro9en applications< despite all the e9idence out there that this is most likely a waste of time. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( 10 2ue#tio$# 1. ,hat are the three basic applications of the phaseJ 2. 6re pro9en practical phase applications accessible to any practitionerJ ). ,hile in the phase< is it possible to actually tra9el through 6fricaJ +. &s it possible to walk on the moon in the phaseJ 5. &s it possible< while in the phase< to appear at the time of the arth8s creationJ -. &n the phase< is it possible to appear in the magical world behind the looking glassJ (. ,hich relati9es can be met in the phaseJ 3. &s it possible to meet and talk to your fa9orite actor in the phaseJ .. ,here can one reali>e any cherished dreamJ 12. "an a practitioner appear in the computer game 8oo#J 11. "an a musician use the phase for creati9e purposesJ 12. *oes the practicing the phase influence a person8s imaginationJ 1). ,hat most probably go9erns the phase spaceJ 1+. ,hat kind of information is obtainable in the phaseJ 1-1
15. ,hile in the phase< is it possible to find out where the lost key to an apartment is locatedJ 1-. ,hat kind of people can disco9er where treasure is hidden in the phaseJ 1(. !hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as accurateJ 13. !hould information obtained in the phase be 9erified after waking up< e9en if it8s already 9erified in the phaseJ 1.. !hould obtaining information occur before deepening has been performedJ 22. To obtain information while using the animate ob5ects techni'ue< who should be talked to if the goal is it to find out the thoughts of a boss at workJ 21. =ow might information from an animate ob5ect be obtainedJ 22. "an an inscription on a wall be used as an inanimate source of informationJ 2). &s it possible to use the episode techni'ue to learn where one has lost the key to one8s apartmentJ 2+. !hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease through phase practiceJ 25. 6re results from influencing physiology in the phase always 122E guaranteedJ 2-. ,hat phase techni'ues might be used to influence the bodies of other peopleJ 2(. &s it possible to obtain information that can be used to influence the body and its functionsJ 23. &s it possible to take a well0known painkiller in the phase and feel its effects on e1itJ 2.. &s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phaseJ )2. "an athletes use the phase to de9elop their skillsJ )1. &s it realistic to e1pect to the soul will e1it the body while practicing the phaseJ )2. &s it possible to enter a parallel uni9erse through the phaseJ )). !hould a practitioner hope to de9elop super0abilities in the phaseJ 1-2
Ta#!# 1. Fisit the Pyramids of $i>a in the phase. Meet your fa9orite singer and tra9el to your dream house. 2. ,hile in the phase< find a wise person who is an authority on matters of the phase and learn from them what entrance techni'ues will best suit your practice. ). Try to percei9e heat throughout the entire body by translocation to a sauna or through auto0suggestion. +. Dearn to mo9e ob5ects by simply staring at them in the phase< and appreciate the e1tent to which this skill is reflected in reality. (ou have in front of you a concise description of the phase-s practical applications, al"eit in condensed for# as full treat#ent of the topic re9uires #uch #ore than a single chapter) . #uch #ore detailed description of $ays to practically apply the phase, along $ith techni9ues for doing so, are contained in the "oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 2 12 Transfor#ation*) +t also provides #any e,a#ples of the pheno#enon in practice)
1-)
1-+
Part III Au?iliary I$formatio$
%ha"ter 11 , U#eful Ti"#

A P(AG/ATI% APP(OA%The only sure way to get practice without unnecessarily wasting time is to ha9e a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and possibilities of the phase phenomenon. The ma5ority of a9ailable information regarding dissociati9e phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob9ious during initial entries into the phase. This is why practice should begin from the perspecti9e of a clean slate< using a logical bearing in thinking? everything not confir#ed "y personal e,perience should "e ta%en $ith a grain of salt) This means only personal e1perience should be taken seriously< not the e1perience of ac'uaintances< authors< teachers< blogs< or forums. To err is human@ thus< it is also human to pass on errors. 6s a result< many parado1ical old wi9es8 tales concerning the phase phenomenon ha9e become accepted a priori. /ot e9erything written in esoteric literature should be thrown out. !ome things may possibly be drawn from it. 6fter reading such literature< a practitioner should not assume that the new knowledge is a uni9ersal truth. 4or a house to stand firm< it needs a solid foundation. The only way to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the phenomenon in a down0to0earth manner< from a scientific perspecti9e< discounting any purported supernatural phenomena. Once a solid foundation has been established< e9eryone has the right to build their own truth on it. I.+)P).+).T A.A1YSIS 1-5
&f a practitioner is only interested in ha9ing phase e1periences< then the simple treatment of this guidebook and other materials may suffice. =owe9er< if a practitioner wants to achie9e the best results< ample focus must be gi9en to indi9idual thought and formation of opinion based on personal analysis. 7ntil all 'uestions are answered through a search for answers in 9arious sources of information< no real progress should be e1pected. Many things cannot be described or e1plained. The resolution of many issues will always remain up to indi9idual 5udgment and understanding. 4inding all of the answers is impossible. Moreo9er< trying to possess all of the answers is a serious inhibitor to real progress because the practitioner would ha9e to digress into dubious literature and con9ersation aside from real< formati9e practice. The ad9ice and e1periences of others may lead to error. &n no case should there be any authorities or unachie9able ideals. 6 logical< e9en skeptical approach should be taken during research and practice. The goal of this guidebook is to pro9ide the reader with linear< factual information sufficient for the de9elopment of independent analysis. ach time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible phenomenon or problem when performing phase techni'ues< an independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed before looking elsewhere for the cause. &f a seeker looks for answers outside of personal reasoning< there is a high risk of assimilating and acting upon a fallacy. Many practitioners are not willing to analy>e personal successes and failures< and instead search all sorts of books< which often contradict one another< and using a hodge0podge of e1traneous< un9erified information can only lead one to further< and 'uite infectious< fallacy. APP(OA%- TO 1IT)(ATU() Diterature of e9ery sort has always been the main 9ehicle for disseminating information about the phase state. The phase phenomenon is referred to by other terms? astral pro5ection< out0 1--
of0body tra9el< or lucid dreaming. &n addition to disseminating information< many books are often 9ehicles for disseminating fallacies. This is easy to recogni>e when researching se9eral such books and comparing described e9ents and theories. The information is more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that ha9e ne9er been 9erified by anyone< including the authors. The result is a mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality< nearly always accompanied by a false certainty about the sub5ect matter. =owe9er< unlike the real world< the phase is not a place where one can belie9e one8s eyes or feelings. The phases8 appearance and 'ualities depend 9ery much on the person e1periencing it. 4or e1ample< if a practitioner belie9es upon entering the phase the body will be lying nearby on the bed< then it will always be there. &f a practitioner belie9es that the percei9ed body should always be tethered to the physical body< then in the practitioner will always see and e9en feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case of e1pectations becoming reality. !imilarly< someone who has entered the phase by accident and thinks that the time of death has arri9ed may see angels and a tunnel with a light at the end. &f someone is e1tremely religious< there may be a perception that something holy< e9en $od< has appeared. &f entry to the phase is construed as a result of being abducted by aliens< then that is e1actly what will happen. This would all be 'uite funny if it were not actually encountered. ,hen it occurs< the only thing left to do is to belie9e. To belie9e< to tell others about it< and write books about it... There are authors who impart no illusions< but it is often difficult for a no9ice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication< which is why a skeptical approach to the contents of any book is warranted. The only truth con9eyed in any book is that which has been 9erified by personal e1perience. The rest should simply be noted and possibly taken into consideration. &n conclusion< books should be studied to disco9er techni'ue0related information that allows a practitioner to enter 1-(
the phase and control the e1perience. This is the only point of intersection among all beliefs and theories. P(A%TI%) ).6I(O./).T !ince techni'ues used to enter the phase are associated with a specific type of mental operation< it is necessary to create comfortable conditions so that e1ternal distracters are kept to a minimum. 6 room should neither be too cold or too hot< nor too bright. Performing techni'ues at a comfortable temperature in a darkened room or while wearing a sleeping mask are ways to promote unhindered practice. &nterfering noises are often also ma5or distracters and isolation from such noises is necessary to successful practice. &t is often sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and windows. &f this does not help< or if it is e1tremely loud outside the window< one can use standard earmuffs. &t is also helpful to gi9e ad9ance notice to people so that they are not alarmed. &t is also preferable that no one is in the bed with the practitioner. Most often< domestic animals interfere with the performance of techni'ues< which is why they should be fed beforehand and kept out of the room where direct or indirect techni'ues are practiced. TA13I.G *IT- 1I3)-/I.+)+ P)OP1) $reat benefit is deri9ed by discussing personal e1periences with other practitioners. This leads to an e1change of information< new knowledge< and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues. The greatest effect comes through communication in person< and not solely through mail< forums< and blogs. Meeting face0to0face with like0minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful knowledgebase to consider during indi9idual practice. *ue to the fact that knowledge of the phenomenon is underde9eloped< difficulties may arise in finding someone to talk to. This can be sol9ed by personally sharing phase e1periences with friends and family members< regardless of whether they are 1-3
fellow practitioners. &t is e9en better to pass on training literature< like this guidebook. The website www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum de9oted to the phase< making it possible to obtain and e1change a large amount of information. The site also has the contact information for the coordinators of Phase Practitioner "lubs all around the world< which is a non0commercial association of enthusiasts who meet to e1change and discuss e1periences. T-) (IG-T *AY TO 3))P A FOU(.A1 Heeping a 5ournal can be of much help while learning and practicing the phase. ,hen properly kept< a 5ournal can help a practitioner to de9elop an analysis that will increase the 'uality of phase e1periences. %y and large< keeping a 5ournal helps to iron out a sporadic practice< turning it into a structured discipline that can be mastered. 6n effecti9e diary should contain a massi9e amount of indicators that allow a statistical study to unco9er patterns. &t is essential that each entry include the date< time of day or night< a detailed account of entries into the phase and phase e1periences. *escriptions of mistakes and a plan of action for the ne1t phase should also be recorded. *uring the no9ice stages of practice< e9en noting unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. Dater on< only successful phase e1periences may be recorded. =ere is an e1ample of a proper 5ournal entry? +ata& 7,perience 4o) 12 January ;th, 2 I 2/== FM )?"erie$ce& + $o%e up early in the #orning) .fter e,ercising, + too% a sho$er and ate "rea%fast) + $atched TG and read "oo%s until lunch) + laid do$n for a nap at 1 FM, right after lunch) + felt li%e perfor#ing indirect techni9ues, and affir#ed this 1-.
intention) + $o%e up the first ti#e to #ove#ent, "ut after trying to e#ploy forced falling asleep Cin order to negate the effects of the #ove#ent0, + fell asleep) + $o%e up the second ti#e $ithout #ove#ent and tried to roll out) This didn3t $or% and + tried levitating and getting up) .fter that, + #oved on to phanto# $iggling) Move#ent occurred in #y right hand) .fter doing this for several seconds, + decided to try listening in) Sounds started, "ut + $as una"le to #a%e the# louder) 5o$ever, i#ages appeared "efore #y eyes and + started to vie$ the#) .fter they "eca#e realistic, + decided to try rolling out and it $or%ed $ithout a hitch) My vision $as di#, as if through a veil) But then, the rest of the sensations + felt reached the verge of reality) This is $hen + $ent to the $indo$) For so#e reason, it $as su##er outside, and not $inter) There $as a red fire-truc% outside the $indo$) There $ere really lo$ clouds in the s%y) The sun $as a"ove the#) 4e,t, everything 9uic%ly faded a$ay and + found #yself "ac% in #y "ody) Then, + got up and loo%ed at the ti#e) +t $as 2/1; FM) /i#ta!e#& 1) :hen the phanto# $iggling $or%ed, + should have aggressively tried to increase the range of #ove#ent, and not si#ply done $iggling, let alone change to another techni9ue) .fter all, if $iggling occurs, the phase can al$ays "e entered) 2) The sa#e $ith the sounds) + had no great desire to a#plify sounds or even listen in) 7verything $as done lac%adaisically) =) + should have started $ith deepening and not actions, as visual sensations $ere not vivid) J) + should have e#ployed techni9ues for #aintaining) ;) (ou can3t loo% do$n for long $ithout si#ultaneously using techni9ues for #aintaining, yet + too% in everything outside the $indo$ and in the s%y) K) + forgot a"out the plan of action) L) + should have tried again to enter the phase) 1(2
Pla$ of actio$ for $e?t time& 1) 8efinitely deepen the phase as #uch as possi"le) 2) + should try to go through a $all) =) Translocate to #y .untie in 4e$ (or%) J) Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty and e,a#ine her cro$n) ;) Try to conduct the e,peri#ent of putting #y hand into #y head)
1(1
%ha"ter 12 , Practitio$er#I )?"erie$ce#

T-) SIG.I'I%A.%) O' OT-)( P)OP1)IS )4P)(I).%)S The ability to analy>e the e1periences of others can be a great supplement to personal training. This allows a practitioner to re9iew and think through situations that ha9e not yet been personally encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e1periences of other practitioners< fewer mistakes will be made during indi9idual practice. Reading the e1periences contained in this section will shed much light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners took to achie9e results will be subconsciously retained by the reader8s memory. Dater< these actions may reproduce similar circumstances in the phase< affording 9aluable opportunities to respond using proper actions. 6t the beginning stages of practice< many practitioners lack in real descriptions of phase e1periences while techni'ue0 related knowledge abounds. Techni'ues can be conceptuali>ed in many different ways< while descriptions of their application are much more demonstrati9e. Thus< many practitioners ha9e no idea about how genuine practice transpires. The e1periences described in this section are useful 0 e9en from a psychological point of 9iew. 9en if a person belie9es that the phase phenomenon e1ists< it may be construed as e1tremely difficult or personally impossible. 6fter learning about other people8s e1periences< a person will reali>e that these practitioners ha9e been able to enter the phase without any complicated or incomprehensible techni'ues. The reader will understand that the 1(2
key is to take right actions at the right moment< trying to master the phase with calmness and confidence. ,hile re9iewing and analy>ing other people8s e1periences in this section< the reader should remember that these e1periences are based on personal beliefs about the phenomenon< which is why occult terminology and notions may be encountered. =owe9er< such aspects of the descriptions are not important. 4ocus should be gi9en to techni'ue0related actions described in the accounts. The reader should also take into account that some nuances :like e1periential realism; are not always clear in the te1t and that it is not always possible to determine why certain e9ents occurred in the phase e1periences described here. 6ll of the following descriptions belong to real people who either related the accounts orally< wrote them down during classes at the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el< submitted them 9ia email< or posted them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of recorded< 9erifiable phase descriptions e1ceeds one thousand< only se9eral cases that are illustrati9e and useful for de9eloping analysis ha9e been selected. Primarily< these are descriptions of the practitioners8 initial phase e1periences< which are most rele9ant to new practitioners. The large number of mistakes made by almost e9ery practitioner< regardless of their le9el of e1perience< should not be taken too seriously while reading the comments. 6ctually< it is a rare occasion that the phase is e1perienced without any techni'ue0 related errors. 9erybody makes mistakes. 1periments are listed in ascending order of 'uality and number of properly performed actions. 6ccounts ha9e been published with the permission of the authors. A.A1YSIS O' S)1)%T)+ P(A%TITIO.)(SJ )4P)(I).%)S .o< 1 Bori# Pro$ya!i$ %o"y:riter< 3iev; U!rai$e + $o%e up in the &correct* state) + i##ediately felt vi"rations, and "efore + had ti#e to ti#e to thin% a"out anything, 1()
+ $as %noc%ed out of #y "ody "y a strong %ic%) + started falling) + had no vision, the floor $as gone) Mi%e a nose-diving airplane, + $as in a free-fall) + %ept dropping faster and faster) + started to feel that + $as losing control) The only thing + could do $as increase the speed $ith $hich + fell, all of the $ays that occurred to #e to try #aintain the phase that + atte#pted at that #o#ent only lo$ered #y degree of a$areness) Touching did not do anything for #e, as + $as 6ust an une#"odied spirit in a co#plete vacuu#) Gision $as also #issing) + started to panic due to the i##inent foul) But the acceleration of the fall did not help either, and + $as flying and $aiting for the #o#ent $hen + $ould "e thro$n out into the drea# $orld) .nd + dropped li%e this until + fell asleep) 2ue#tio$#& *id %oris describe a direct or indirect techni'ueJ ,hat could he ha9e done if no spontaneous separation had occurredJ =ow could %oris ha9e more correctly used deepening techni'uesJ ,hy wasnCt %oris thrown into a phase episodeJ ,hy did he fall asleepJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& 6n indirect techni'ue was employed. &f spontaneous separation had not occurred< %oris could ha9e tried to separate on his own. &f an attempt to separate had failed< it would be necessary to implement indirect techni'ues by intensifying the 9ibrations< and then try once again to separate. &n order to deepen and< meanwhile< reach a destination while falling< %oris should ha9e applied translocation techni'ues and< upon reaching a location< continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. 4or e1ample< he could ha9e applied the techni'ue of translocation by teleportation with his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands through the darkness< which also would ha9e induced an e1it. %oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. &t could ha9e been used for the techni'ue of listening in< which would ha9e helped him to deepen and maintain. The lack of a set aim to land somewhere resulted in his endless fall< though it does not always happen this way. %oris fell asleep due to his passi9ity and also because he forgot that falling asleep was a possibility< though he did remember about the possibility of an inad9ertent return to reality :a foul;. 1(+
.o< 2 Ale?ei Ba!harev )$gi$eer< Sochi; (u##ia This $as the first ti#e that + #anaged to "eco#e conscious $hile drea#ing) Before falling asleep, + concentrated on the dar%ness "efore #y eyes and tried to re#ain consciousness as long as + could) .ll of a sudden, + drea#t that + $as levitating to the ceiling, $hich resulted in #y "eco#ing conscious that + $as drea#ing) My phanto# "ody responded poorly to atte#pts to control it, and si#ply hovered "eneath the ceiling) There $ere t$o people sitting on the floor "elo$) They $ere loo%ing in #y direction, "ut it see#ed that they did not see #e) .t this point + $o%e up and felt so#e sort of tingling and itching in #y legs) 2ue#tio$#& ,hat factors led to the entry into the phase through dream consciousnessJ ,hat needed to be done while ho9ering about beneath the ceilingJ ,hy did the foul happen so fastJ ,hat should ha9e been done immediately after returning to the bodyJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& *ream consciousness occurred due to the 6le1ei8s intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of becoming conscious was caused by the sensation of flying while dreaming. 4lying almost always becomes an anchor for dream consciousness. &mmediately after the phase occurred< 6le1ei should ha9e started deepening. &nstead< he simply ho9ered about and obser9ed. ,hile all the mo9ements may ha9e been difficult to perform< they should ha9e ne9ertheless still been done 9ery acti9ely. 6s a result< lightness and a deepening of the phase would ha9e ensued. =is inad9ertent e1it from the phase happened due to passi9ity< failure to deepen< and non0compliance with the rules for maintaining the phase. 9en upon returning to his body< 6le1ei should ha9e tried to separate again. .o< @ +mitry /ar!ov (adio /echa$ic< /o#co:; (u##ia 1(5
My first ti#e $as the #ost terri"le event in #y life) + had never e,perienced such terror) +t happened in 8ece#"er, 1!! ) + $as falling asleep in #y "ed at ho#e) Suddenly, + heard so#eone enter #y roo#, "ut + did not pay attention to the &intruder*) Then, t$o fe#ale hands gra""ed #e fro# "ehind, and $hile pressing #y "elly, started to lift #y "ody up) + distinctly felt thin fingers $ith long nails on #y "elly, "ut $as co#pletely paraly1ed and a"solutely una"le #ove any part of #y "ody or put up any %ind of resistance) + felt #y "ody go through the ceiling, "ut then $as pulled still higher and higher) + got scared that this could "e death) + $as afraid not so #uch of death as of the un%no$n) .ll of this happened so s$iftly that + found #yself unprepared for such a crossover) + started to pray) + as%ed @od to help #e free #yself and go "ac%) + panic%ed) + can3t say ho$ #any seconds #y forced levitation lasted or ho$ high + $as lifted a"ove #y house, "ut the #o#ent ca#e $hen + instantly returned to #y "ed) 2ue#tio$#& ,as this entry into the phase deliberateJ ,hat kind of techni'ue led to the phaseJ ,hat is the name for the complete immobili>ation that *mitry encounteredJ ,hat should he ha9e done in order to start mo9ingJ ,hy did his body easily go through the ceilingJ ,hy was he able to stop this terrible e1perience by prayingJ ,hat could he ha9e done immediately upon returning to his bodyJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& This phase e1perience was spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni'ues since there was no significant lapse into sleep. The whole e1perience was accompanied by sleep paralysis< which is why it was difficult for *mitry to do anything. &n order to mo9e in this type of situation< it would ha9e been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an indirect techni'ue or redouble efforts to mo9e.p *mitry8s body went through the ceiling without any difficulty because there was no 9ision and the phase itself had not been deepened< otherwise this would not ha9e happened so easily. Praying and appealing to $od helped in this case because praying facilitated a rela1ation of perceptions and an intention to go back to reality? two factors which are crucial during emergency return 1(-
techni'ues. 7pon returning to his body< he could ha9e still tried to separate again< though this would ha9e been easier said than done due to the fear associated with the first e1perience. .o< A Iva$ Ya!ovlev Stude$t< A$t:er"; Belgium + don3t %no$ $hat $o%e #e up, "ut + %ne$ right a$ay that so#ething $as out of order) + could not open #y eyes, and #y "ody $as al#ost 6ust as%ing to rise up) + understood $hat $as going on N all of this indicated that + $as having an out-of-"ody e,perience) The first thing + tried $as to lift #y left hand up, and it $or%ed) + understood that this $as an astral hand, "ecause + could see through it) + #oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed CThere $as a strange sensation in #y head at that ti#e0) + cal#ed do$n and tried to do so#ething again) + levitated a"out half a #eter a"ove the "ed) Gision ca#e "ac% to #e right then and + sa$ $hat appeared to "e #y roo#, "ut not e,actly it, as the rug on the floor $as of a different color pattern and the door $as closed for so#e reason) + could not co#prehend $hy everything $as lit fro# "ehind #y "ac%) Then, + loo%ed over #y left shoulder and sa$ a s#all "right $hite "all "ehind #y shoulder "lade at a distance of I inches) +t $as lighting up the roo# up) Then + tried to go through the door, "ut $as una"le to) Out of the fear that + $ould never return to #y real "ody, + $o%e up in the everyday $orld) 2ue#tio$#& *uring the beginning of his e1perience< what phenomenon typical to the phase and awakening did &9an encounterJ ,hat kind of techni'ue< direct or indirect< led to the phaseJ ,hat specific techni'ues were employedJ =ow could the sensation of Athe body 5ust asking to rise upB ha9e been usedJ ,hat should ha9e been done immediately when he reali>ed that it was possible to raise his handJ ,hat should ha9e been the first actions taken after le9itationJ ,hy was it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the doorJ ,hat should ha9e been done when &9an returned to his bodyJ *oes this practitioner ha9e a down0to0earth 9iew or an esoteric 9iew of the nature of this phenomenonJ 1((
A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& 7pon awakening in a state of sleep paralysis< &9an understood that he could use this opportunity for the phase and immediately started attempts to separate without employing techni'ues for creating the state< as they would ha9e been superfluous. This was an indirect techni'ue by nature. =e could ha9e followed his impulse to le9itate from the 9ery beginning instead of mo9ing his hands. 6fter his hand started to mo9e< he could ha9e stood up or separated. &nstead< &9an simply rolled o9er and calmed down for an instant< although doing so is strongly discouraged and is a waste of the progress made up to this point. Then< after starting to le9itate< he should ha9e< first of all< assumed a position distinct from that of his real body< stood up on the floor< and immediately started deepening. &nstead< he di9erted his attention to the light source and an attempt to go through the door. 9en if e9erything had been done correctly from the beginning< there would ha9e been no reason to attempt to go through the door. &9an could ha9e simply opened it. The skill of going through ob5ects should be learned after first fine0tuning the ability to deepen and maintain the phase. There was no reason to return out of fear< but e9en a return to the body< another immediate attempt at separating would most likely ha9e been successful. The use of the term of Aastral handB indicates that the practitioner harbors esoteric 9iews on the sub5ect. .o< = .atalya 3o>he$ova )$gi$eer< Shchel!ovo; (u##ia :hen + $as a"out 1L or 1I years old, + read so#e esoteric articles on astral pro6ection) They see#ed 9uite interesting to #e, "ut no #ore than a curiosity N + did not particularly "elieve in such things) One evening, + $ent to "ed as usual) + $o%e up in the #iddle of the night, "ut $as una"le to #ove #y "ody and there $as a loud noise in #y head) 5aving "een re#inded of those articles, + si#ply tried to levitate and + #anaged to do so, as if through #y forehead so#eho$) The sensation of flying $as very 1(3
realistic, to #y great surprise) The first thought that occurred to #e $as, O:o$, these astral guys $eren3t lying2* + hovered a"ove #y "ody for so#e ti#e in the dar%) + thought of vision, and it started to appear) + then fle$ to$ards the $indo$, and upon turning around in to face #y "ody, + sa$ it in its proper place) + decided to fly "ac% to it and touch it) :hen + finally po%ed it, it suc%ed #y "ac% into it, causing a 9uite strange sensation) 2ue#tio$#& ,hat type of techni'ue did /atalya useJ ,hat would she ha9e needed to do if her attempt at le9itating had been unsuccessfulJ ,hy was the phase short0li9edJ ,hat should she ha9e done upon returning to her bodyJ ,hy did she use the term AastralBJ ,ere the articles about astral pro5ection of any significant helpJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& 7pon awakening in a state of a sleep paralysis< /atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect techni'ues. !he managed to separate immediately< but if she8d encountered problems in doing so< she could ha9e started the techni'ue of listening in to the AnoiseB in her head. The phase was short0li9ed due to a lack of acti9ity and failure to perform deepening and AmaintainingB techni'ues. 6fter returning to her body< she should ha9e tried to immediately separate. /atalya holds esoteric 9iews on the nature of the phase phenomenon< which is why she uses such terminology for it. =owe9er< the articles helped her to perform the right actions at the right moment. .o C Ale?a$der 'urme$!ov Stude$t< Sai$t Peter# urg; (u##ia + $o%e up at early in the night after so#e difficulties $ith falling asleep) Blurred i#ages started to float "efore #y eyes and + reali1ed that + could enter the phase) + started to discard unnecessary i#ages, and after getting ahold of one of the#, + e#erged in so#e %ind of a yello$ corridor) The level of general realness and a$areness of the e,perience $as a"out I < to ! < of that of reality) + re#e#"ered a"out the #ethods for deepening, $hich is $hy + started to loo% at everything going on around #e, "ut this did not yield any serious results) + started to touch #yself, 1(.
"ut all sensation see#ed so#e$hat da#pened) + reali1ed that + $as losing a$areness) + ca#e round, "ut nevertheless fell asleep in a"out 2 seconds) 2ue#tio$#& &s it possible to call the techni'ue used in this description a direct techni'ueJ ,hat specific techni'ue for creating the phase was employedJ ,hich separation techni'ue did 6le1ander useJ ,hat could ha9e been the reason for the Adampened sensationB and inability to deepenJ ,hat caused him to fall asleepJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& The techni'ue employed cannot be considered a direct one< though it was used at the beginning of the night. 6s a matter of fact< it appears that the preliminary lapse of consciousness into sleep was significant. &f such preliminary sleep had lasted only se9eral minutes< the techni'ue could ha9e been considered partially direct. The techni'ue for obser9ing images was employed correctly because the images appeared on their own. 6le1ander did not employ any techni'ues for separation< as the obser9ing images techni'ue often brings the obser9er into the obser9ed image or some other world< which is e1actly what happened here. Most likely< the weakness of the phase was due to meager le9els of acti9ity and moti9ation< which were caused by the fact that it was early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep because he failed to deepen sufficiently and not keep from falling asleep. $eneral acti9ity was also 9ery low. The body8s desire to fall asleep played a ma5or role in the process. 6le1ander had< after all< been ha9ing problems sleeping. .o< D (oma$ (eutov Sy#tem Admi$i#trator< Samara; (u##ia Truly, the #ost interesting things al#ost al$ays happen une,pectedly) .fter a sufficiently long "rea% in #y atte#pts to go to the other $orld, tonight + decided to try it again) + thre$ in the to$el after yet another unsuccessful atte#pt, rolled to #y other side, and decided to si#ply get a good night3s sleep) + do not %no$ e,actly ho$ #uch ti#e passed $hile + lay do$n and thought 132
a"out $hat + $as still doing $rong $hile o"serving interesting i#ages that #y i#agination $as dra$ing) But at one fine #o#ent, + suddenly felt the pheno#enon that is co##only referred to as vi"rations) + started to intensify the# C+ should add that the feeling is indescri"a"le0, "ut + could not levitate, though + really $anted to ta%e a loo% at #yself fro# the outside) + decided to si#ply stand up, and that3s $hen it all "eca#e #ost interesting2 The entire process of transitioning fro# a hori1ontal position to a vertical one $as acco#panied "y increasingly palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring sound in #y head) The sensation $as the sa#e as that e,perienced after going to "ed after not having slept for 2J hours and then "eing suddenly roused "y so#e"ody/ #y head spun, everything started crac%ling inside of it, and + $as a"out to lose consciousness) Then, a flic%ering picture started to appear) +t sta"ili1ed after one or t$o seconds, the roaring in #y head died do$n, and + reali1ed that + $as sitting on #y "ed) + $as in #y apart#ent, thought it $as noticea"ly altered) My roo# see#ed #ore or less the sa#e, though the interior $as indeed different upon detailed e,a#ination) For e,a#ple, #y #o"ile phone, $hich is al$ays $ithin a reach, $as so#eho$ an older and different #odel) +t turned out to "e the first o"6ect that + tested, as + suddenly $anted very #uch to find out $hat ti#e it $as and chec% $hich day of the #onth it $as) + distinctly felt the phone in #y hand, "ut upon atte#pting to concentrate on and loo% at the display, + $as thro$n "ac% into the reality) + i##ediately cli#"ed "ac% out of #y "ody and decided to si#ply pace around the apart#ent $hile trying to re#e#"er $hat + could e,peri#ent on) + tried to con6ure an o"6ect, "ut that didn3t $or% and resulted in so#e #ental activity) This caused the phase to fade and #y "eing thro$n "ac% into reality) +n total, there $ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for 2 to = #inutes each) The e,periences $ere not sta"le at all, $hich is $hy + $as e,a#ining #y surroundings in a hurry, al$ays trying to get ahold of anything + could get #y hand on) 5o$ever, there $ere a good a#ount of i#pressions, considering that it $as #y first entry) 131
2ue#tio$#& ,hat type of techni'ue did Roman use to enter the phaseJ ,hat were the key precursors of the phaseJ ,hich separation techni'ue was usedJ &f Roman had failed to completely separate< what techni'ue< besides 9ibrations< should he ha9e consideredJ ,hat is the most likely reason for all of the foulsJ ,hich single action allowed the practitioner to make the phase fi9e times longerJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& The phase was entered through a direct techni'ue< with the comfortable position that Roman was lying in being the main catalyst. 6s long as Roman was lying in an uncomfortable position< his mind was unable to completely turn off physical perception< and this was most likely the reason why there were no short lapses in dreaming. &f Roman were still unable to separate when using the techni'ue of standing up< or any other techni'ue besides intensifying the 9ibrations< he could ha9e tried listening in< as there was some noise. &nstead of using his first phase e1perience to work on mastering the basic skills of deepening and maintaining< Roman immediately indulged in comple1 e1periments< which is why his multiple entries within the same phase were brief< of poor 'uality< and not used effecti9ely. %ut this is all typical during initial e1periences and a lot was still accomplished< especially considering that a direct techni'ue was used. The relati9e length of the phase was achie9ed mainly thanks to complying with the single way to maintain the phase # repeated separation< which Roman managed to do fi9e times. .o< E Ale?a$der +yre$!ov Stude$t< /o#co:; (u##ia My first entry happened at night) + $as lying in "ed and thin%ing a"out the phase, as + had "een una"le to fall asleep for a $hile) + do1ed off for a #o#ent and then a$o%e again, this ti#e already in the proper state, and then easily rolled out C#ore or less unconsciously and refle,ively0) + $ent deeper "y #eans of touching and then falling headfirst) +t is a pity that +3ve already forgotten a lot of the e,perience, "ut + do re#e#"er that after deepening + fell right do$n onto the yard of #y grand#other3s 132
house, "ut then lost consciousness, and so + returned into #y "ody and rolled out of it several ti#es) + $as una"le to sharpen all #y senses/ :hen + deepened one sense Ctouch, for e,a#ple0, another Ci)e) sight0 $ould fade a$ay) .fter that, + have a gap in #y #e#ory concerning #y travels Cconsciousness and lucidity $ere $ea%, and + fell asleep and &resurfaced* several ti#es0, "ut + re#e#"er having "een to a lot of places) 5ere-s ho$ the episode ended/ + dove headfirst into $ater fro# a high "oard Cafter first having deepened a "it0, and then #y sense of touch gre$ sharper/ + felt &$ater* and hit #y head against a very soft &"otto#)* + resu#ed the interrupted fall through $illpo$er, "ut then it occurred to #e that #y grand#other $anted to $a%e #e up) My level of a$areness $as not 9uite ade9uate, as it did not occur to #e that + $as actually sleeping in a dor#itory, and not at #y grand#other-s house) That3s $hy + decided that + needed to return to #y "ody) . sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and $as follo$ed "y sensations si#ilar to those one e,periences $hen hung-over) 2ue#tio$#& ,as a direct or indirect techni'ue appliedJ ,hat made the implementation of the techni'ue successfulJ ,hy was 6le1ander e5ected into his grandmotherCs yardJ ,hile deepening< how could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a time ha9e been sol9edJ ,hy did the practitioner ha9e gaps in his memoryJ ,hat were the main problems associated with maintaining the phaseJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& *espite the brief lapse in consciousness< the techni'ue used was a direct one< and that 9ery lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state< e9en though this was 6le1ander8s first e1perience. The e5ection into his grandmotherCs yard was spontaneous< and was most likely caused by some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going there. 7ne1pected translocation often occurs when deepening while falling headfirst. Nuite possibly< in order to a9oid ha9ing the senses of sight and touch enhance only one at a time< he should ha9e simultaneously applied the techni'ues of touching and looking out. 6s for maintaining the phase< there were three main problems that were also direct causes of the gaps in 6le1anderCs memory? 13)
little depth< lack of a clear plan of action< and non0compliance with the rules for maintaining the phase :with the e1ception of multiple entries after return to the body;. .o< G Svyato#lav Bara$ov Stude$t< Perm; (u##ia + $o%e up on #y side) + didn3t feel li%e sleeping any#ore, "ut + closed #y eyes any$ay) :hen + lay do$n on #y "ac%, + i##ediately felt the sensation that + $as a"out to fall fro# the couch C+ $as lying on the edge0, and so#e %ind of lapse occurred, as if + $as "eing pulled so#e$here) + lay do$n once again, and this "u11ing started, and a green light appeared "efore #y eyes) + lay "ac% even further, and #y eyelids started to flutter) + thought that + #ight fall fro# the couch at that #o#ent, "ut then #y vision ca#e to #e, and + o"served that + $as already lying on the floor ne,t to the couch2 + got up on #y feet and noticed that the roo# $as &spinning* as if + $ere drun%, "ut everything 9uite 9uic%ly $ent "ac% to nor#al) .t that very #o#ent, + understood that this $as it2 The phase itself2 +n ecstasy, + forgot a"out all the techni9ues and $ent to loo% a"out the roo#) 7verything $as 6ust li%e in reality, "ut so#e things $ere out of place) + tried to levitate and "ent "ac%$ards, and $as so#eho$ thrust outside) +t $as dus% out there, and there $as a lot of sno$ on the ground) + $ent around the house and tried to levitate) + $as a"le to soar up$ards, and sa$ the hori1on and sunset) But then + "egan to lose altitude) .fter having flo$n to the $indo$ on the other side of the house, + $anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul occurred) +n a fraction of a second, + had the sensation that + $as &no$here*) But then, #y real eyes opened C$ith difficulty0 and there $as once again the feeling of so#e sort of lapse) .$areness $as di# during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep) 2ue#tio$#& ,hat kind of phase entrance techni'ue did !9yatosla9 useJ ,hich specific techni'ue produced resultsJ ,hich separation techni'ue was employedJ &f separation was unsuccessful< which techni'ue should ha9e been immediately usedJ ,hich important actions did he not perform enough after 13+
entering the phaseJ ,hat should ha9e been done after the foulJ ,hy was awareness dim during the phaseJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$tary& 6n indirect techni'ue was employed. /o phase state creation techni'ues were employed by !9yatosla9. &nstead< separation immediately worked through rolling backwards. &f separation were unsuccessful< he should ha9e proceeded with obser9ing images< which would ha9e been possible with the green light. *eepening was not immediately performed< no effort was made to maintain< and there was no appro1imation of a plan of action@ howe9er< this is not a crucial factor during initial e1periences. 6nother attempt to enter the phase should ha9e been made upon returning to the body< but this was also forgotten. 6wareness was dim and memory was weak during the phase because of the initial shallowness of the state< which was reflected in the perception of the surrounding and also the thought processes. .o< 10 Oleg Su#hche$!o S"ort#ma$< /o#co:; (u##ia Mast night + spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of i#ages in #y #ind after + no left felt any feeling of %inesthetic sense) + $as lying on #y "ac% in an unco#forta"le position) .fter sliding to$ards sleep for so#e ti#e, + felt slight vi"rations and echoes of sounds fro# the drea# $orld, "ut the unco#forta"le position still hindered #e) +n the end, + thought the hec% $ith it, and decided to lie do$n ho$ever $as co#forta"le, and turned over to lie on #y sto#ach) 8espite the fact that the #ove#ent upset the process, after a"out five #inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up) + $as a"le to get a little vi"ration this ti#e, although + $as una"le to a#plify it) + dre$ a picture of #y %itchen in #y #ind, and "ecause the i#ages in that state $ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so#e ti#e + understood that not only $ere #y attention and a$areness there, "ut so $ere #y "odily sensations) + $as 9uite surprised that the phase had "een so easy to fall in to Cthere $as no dou"t that this $as the phase0) 135
+ 6u#ped out through the $indo$ and "egan to fly around the courtyard) .ctually, it $as the first ti#e that + had flo$n only upon a single #ental co##and, $ithout any physical effort, as occurs during drea#s) The courtyard "ore only 1 < si#ilarity to its real-life counterpart, "ut + $as not at all surprised "y this, and + si#ply en6oyed it as #uch as + could, as + $as a"le see and $as not i##ediately thro$n out) But, after having loo%ed at and ta%en in the city, the thought of $hether or not this $as the phase and not 6ust a lucid drea# occurred) + $as so conscious in the drea# that + $as a"le to %no$ a"out and co#prehend such ter#s, and differentiate "et$een the# - can you i#agineH2 + have to add that + gave little attention to #y #e#ory, so + can3t say ho$ #uch of #y &self-a$areness* $as there, "ut + $as a$are enough to "e a"le to differentiate "et$een the phase and a lucid drea# Cor at least thin% a"out the difference0) + even $ent and as%ed people around if it $as the phase or a lucid drea#) Sounds funny, doesn-t itH The funniest thing $as that they ans$ered that it $as a different $orld, and they refused to discuss the topic any further $ith #e) Then, + decided to not get #y #ind all #i,ed up and 6ust go $ith the plot, $hich turned out to "e 9uite long and uninterrupted2 + recalled a #o#ent fro# the day "efore ho$ + had lain do$n and induced the phase $hile lying on #y "ac%, and ho$ + had turned over and flo$n a$ay) + recalled all this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali1ed that + should try to as% a"out $hat had "een going on $ith #e on the foru# later) Then, later in the phase, + found #yself in a "ase#ent) .s there $as 6ust a really nasty s#ell there, + decided that + had already had enough and that it $as ti#e to go "ac%) That happened even #ore easily, as soon as + thought a"out going "ac%, a vi"ration as light as a "ree1e $ent through #e and then + $as "ac% in #y "ody $ith full a$areness and a $ell-rested "ody and #ind) + $as co#pletely refreshed2 .nd that3s despite the fact that + re#e#"er everything, every second of the drea#, fro# the #o#ent + started flying2 2ue#tio$#& ,hich type of techni'ue helped Oleg enter the phaseJ ,hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase< and could this ha9e had a positi9e effect on later resultsJ ,hat 13-
can be said of techni'ues related to 9ibrations in the conte1t of OlegCs entry into the phaseJ ,hich specific techni'ue brought him into the phaseJ ,hich initial actions should ha9e been taken upon entry into the phaseJ ,hat was lacking that could ha9e lead to producti9e use of the phaseJ ,as it worthwhile to immediately translocate by 5umping through the windowJ ,hat was the cause of reflection on whether the e1perience was the phase or a conscious dreamJ ,as it beneficial to try to offhandedly learn from ob5ects what type of state this wasJ ,hy did the desire to return back to the body arise< and what could ha9e caused itJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$tary& Oleg entered the phase using a direct techni'ue. =e was initially unable to enter due to the uncomfortable position that he had assumed< although lapses in consciousness into short dreams did occur. /e9ertheless< the initially unsuccessful techni'ue still ended in a positi9e final outcome because the state that Oleg was in was close to the phase. =owe9er< attention should not ha9e been gi9en to 9ibration amplification techni'ues< especially straining the brain and straining the body without using muscles< as they can be detrimental during direct techni'ues. The techni'ue of 9isuali>ation was used immediately before entering the phase instead of obser9ing images< which is used more often. Oleg deliberately con5ured the obser9ed images instead of searching for them in front of himself< which is where the difference between the techni'ues lies. =owe9er< he did not perform deepening upon entering the phase. 6dditionally< he had no clear plan of action to ensure that the phase would be producti9e !tarting to translocate by 5umping through windows should only be done by those with a certain amount of e1perience since beginners sometimes percei9e reality to be the phase< or the phase to be reality. The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon was due to terminological confusion< which is 'uite widespread. &f a practitioner is aware but does not feel the body as in the physical world< then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is why there was no reason to in'uire about this among animate ob5ects. 13(
*eliberately returning to the body was a big mistake. There was no reason to throw away an opportunity to tra9el and use the phase. %eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for the return to the body in this case is most likely found in the absence of a plan of action and lack of clear understanding of how the phase might be used for practical aims. .o< 11 Ale?a$der 1ele!ov %om"uter Programmer< Sai$t Peter# urg; (u##ia + tried all night to use the .stral ?atapult that cues you $hen you3re drea#ing, "ut + gave up on the idea after several unsuccessful a$a%enings and si#ply fell asleep) :hen +-# drea#ing + usually #ove "y ta%ing great leaps, #uch further than a %angaroo, a"out 1 -= yards) This happens regularly in #y drea#s, and + usually i##ediately reali1e that +-# in a drea#) 8uring one of the leaps, + reali1ed $hile air"orne that + $as drea#ing and also reali1ed that + $as a"le to land in a s#all dirty pond) .s e,pected, + landed right in the pond and $ent deep under the $ater) .nd at that very #o#ent, + found #yself in the stencil, $ith #y hands and head half stuc% in it) + got a little nervous that this atte#pt $ould also "e unsuccessful, and so + i##ediately tried to separate fro# #y "ody) + $as una"le to get #y head or hands out, and for the first ti#e + tried to turn around round #y a,is and #anaged to get out) Then + either slipped do$n or fell fro# the "ed, "ut + did not feel any pain) + cra$led for 1-2 #eters and then felt that + could go "ac%) + started to touch the rug and so#e other thing, though + don3t %no$ e,actly $hat it $as as it $as dar%, and, lo and "ehold/ $ithin 2 -= seconds + pro"a"ly felt $hat s#all %ittens feel $hen their eyes open for the first ti#e) 7verything $as foggy and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the roo# filled $ith light, and colors "eca#e "right and vivid) + tried very hard to restrain #y e,cite#ent, and, to #y surprise, $as a"le to) + $al%ed around #y apart#ent thin%ing a"out $hat + should do) Reali1ing that + did not have that #uch ti#e, + decided to tal% to an elderly #an $ho $ould ans$er #y 9uestions) + 133
decided that there $ould "e an o#niscient elderly #an "ehind the apart#ent-s front door, $hich + $as a"out to open) .nd there he $as, half-"ald, a"out K years old, in a grey coat $aiting for #e) + as%ed hi# the 9uestion, &:hat should + do to get into the phase #ore oftenH* But he started to tell #e a"out ho$ he $as raped as a child) .nd to "e #ore precise, this $as already not an elderly #an, "ut an elderly $o#an) + $as not very interested in hearing her story, thus + tried to #ove a$ay fro# her, suggesting that $e could tal% later) But the elderly $o#an $as persistent, and + did not $ant to offend her, "ecause + thought that this $as an unusual drea# $ith its o$n set of rules, and na#ely that once you have as%ed an old $o#an a 9uestion, you are supposed to "e courteous and listen to the entire ans$er) + $ent $ith her to the %itchen of #y apart#ent) The telephone suddenly rang) + got scared that the telephone $as ringing in #y apart#ent and $ould $a%e #e up, $hich is $hy + i##ediately started to loo% at #y hand in order to #aintain) But the sensations $ere 9uite sta"le, and + stopped doing that) Then, #e and this lady $anted to coo% so#ething in #y %itchen) She said that + could heat a frying pan $ithout gas) But + instead decided to try the techni9ue of putting the hands together and "lo$ing on the#, and returned "ac% into #y "ody) 2ue#tio$#& ,hich type of the entry into the phase did 6le1ander describeJ ,as the cueing program of any helpJ ,hich type of anchor was the leapingJ ,hy was the onset of consciousness immediately followed by a transition into the stencil< i.e.< the real body< though not completelyJ ,hich separation techni'ue helped him to get out of his body againJ ,hich techni'ue was used for deepeningJ ,hich techni'ue for materiali>ing an ob5ect was used correctlyJ ,hat should the procedure for obtaining information ha9e been started withJ ,hat importance does a polite attitude towards elderly women in the phase ha9eJ ,hy was the return to body possibleJ ,hat did 6le1ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foulJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& 6le1ander described an entry into the phase through dream consciousness. %y and large< the onset of consciousness was facilitated by prior work with the 13.
cueing program< which< though it failed to yield results< strengthened the necessary intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onset of consciousness may be compared with the sensations of le9itation that often lead to practitioners achie9ing dream consciousness. !ince the techni'ues for deepening and maintaining were not used at the moment of dream consciousness< a return to the body< though partial< naturally occurred. 4urthermore< 6le1ander managed to apply a separation techni'ue that most resembled climbing out. =e then managed to deepen correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. *espite the lack of a plan of action< the practitioner competently decided to do something useful and employed the techni'ue of finding through a door in order to locate an animate source of information. =e should ha9e first tried to test the sub5ect by asking special 'uestions to determine if the ob5ect would be able to pro9ide information :see "hapter 12;. %eing polite to animate ob5ects in the phase is the prerogati9e of each person on an indi9idual basis< but it hardly has any real basis. Most likely< the return to the body was triggered by a failure to maintain< e1cessi9e thinking< or temporary passi9ity. 7pon e1iting the phase< 6le1ander should ha9e tried to immediately return. =owe9er< he failed to do so< e9en though he had returned to the phase after e1iting dream consciousness. !uch a step should ha9e been ob9ious due to an incomplete connection to the body. .o< 12 Bori# Be$der /ovie Tech$icia$; )?"erie$ced Practitio$er of the Pha#e< /o#co:; (u##ia + "eca#e conscious in #y drea# al#ost i##ediately after falling asleep) + $as in #y apart#ent standing in the corridor) Being surprised "y having so suddenly found #yself in the phase, + started to touch the $alls $ith #y hands to test their fir#ness or, Orealness,O as $ell as to intensify the phase "y touching) + entered the roo#) There $as a "ed standing ne,t to the $all, $ith #y #other sleeping on it) + could not see her face, only her "ody 1.2
under the "lan%et) The roo# and corridor $ere e,act replicas of their real-life counterparts) :hile thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other, + suddenly started to feel so#e$hat uneasy) :hen + approached the $indo$, + sa$ a grotes9ue landscape "ehind it that $as si#ilar to pictures fro# #ovies a"out catastrophes/ a $asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups of "uilding #aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro# e,plosions here and there, and + noticed hu#an figures in so#e places) Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that + $as ta%ing in a panora#ic vie$ Cthe vie$ fro# the $indo$ spanned 1I degrees and cut off at the hori1on, $hich is in fact al#ost e,actly as the vie$ fro# #y apart#ent is in real life0, + turned "ac% into the roo# and started to touch the $ardro"e, and then %nelt do$n to touch the floor) .ll the $hile, #y fear had "een gro$ing stronger and stronger/ "oth out of thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other and due to the vie$ fro# the $indo$) .n,iety turned into real fear $ithin a #atter of several seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic) + lost the a"ility to thin% critically) + had only one thought/ + had to go "ac% to #y "ody) + darted "ac% to #y "ed and suddenly found #yself lying on it) + closed #y eyes, "ut could not understand if + $ere in #y real "ody or still in the phase) My terror gre$ even stronger $hen + half-opened #y eyes and sa$ that #y #other $as getting up fro# her "ed) She loo%ed li%e a character fro# a horror #ovie and apparently $as hostile to #e) + $anted to disappear, dissolve, and $a%e up2 + hectically tried to recall the techni9ues for an e#ergency e,it fro# the phase, "ut $ith poor results/ + tried to free1e, rela, and touch #y fingers to #y toes in order to feel a connection $ith #y real "ody) .t so#e #o#ents + felt li%e + had it, thin%ing, &The connection had "een restored2* + opened #y eyes, "ut reali1ed that + $as still in the phase $hen + sa$ that the roo# had changed, and $as no$ a$ash $ith gar"age) The fact that the atte#pts %ept ending $ith false a$a%enings $as driving #e cra1y) + $as especially shoc%ed $hen + got up after one of the false a$a%enings and sa$ #y #other standing at #y "ed, still loo%ing threateningly at #e, li%e a 1.1
va#pire or a 1o#"ie fro# a horror #ovie) Flus, she started to reach out to$ard #e $ith her hands2 + nevertheless %ept on and tried to free1e and $iggle #y toes, this ti#e $ithout opening #y eyes, and not chec%ing $here + $as) + started to cal# do$n after so#e ti#e, "ut + $as una"le to feel #y real "ody, $hich $as confir#ed "y the fact that sounds $ere co#ing in fro# the phase/ + heard sparro$s chirping outside the $indo$, though it reality it $as too late for sparro$s to "e out) 5o$ever, the chirping and the associations that it "rought Ci)e) day, $ar#th, sparro$s, and sun0, pro"a"ly helped #e a lot and cal#ed #e do$n, as + finally #anaged to sense #y real "ody and found #yself in reality) 4evertheless, after + got up, + i##ediately started to verify for a"out half a #inute that + $as no longer in the phase "y touching o"6ects, #a%ing sure that they $ere hard, and feeling all of #y "odily sensations) 2ue#tio$#& ,hy was there a risk that %oris could return to his body when taking in the 9iew from the windowJ =ow could %oris ha9e e1amined the panoramic 9iew from the window without worrying about a foulJ ,hich techni'ue for deepening and AmaintainingB was employed se9eral timesJ ,hat would ha9e happened if %oris translocated from the source of the fear to another placeJ =ow could he ha9e o9ercome this problemJ ,hy was %oris unable to easily e1it the phase and why were all of the techni'ues that he knew of no practical useJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& ,hen e1amining distant ob5ects in the phase< there is always a risk of returning to one8s body because the acti9ity is rela1ing and rela1ation is detrimental to the length of a phase. %oris could ha9e continued to take in the 9iew by simultaneously keeping up 9ibrations< periodically e1amining his hands< or rubbing them together. *uring the entire length of %oris8s phase< he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and maintain the phase. &f he tried to run away from his mother to another place in the phase< she probably would ha9e caught up with him there anyway. =e should ha9e tried to yell at her in an aggressi9e tone. This would ha9e helped him to o9ercome his fear and either scare the ob5ect away or make it more agreeable. Problems with an emergency e1it from the phase arose because it was the beginning 1.2
of the night and the mind still needed to dream and< thus< kept pulling him into that process. .o< 1@ Ale?ei Te#le$!o IT )$gi$eer; )?"erie$ced Practitio$er of the Pha#e< /o#co:; (u##ia .ctually, + $as not planning to travel that night, "ut $hen + $o%e up around #idnight + decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless) + started to perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y ar#s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca#e #e and + suddenly $anted to give up #y atte#pts to enter the phase and si#ply fall asleep) 5o$ever, + $as persistent and continued to perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y ar#s) +nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur $hen this techni9ue is perfor#ed, + si#ply fell asleep and continued the phanto# #ove#ents $hile drea#ing) Because of that, #y consciousness apparently did not fall asleep co#pletely, and + "eca#e a$are that + $as drea#ing) + i##ediately cli#"ed out of #y "ody) There $as no vision, conscious a$areness $as no #ore than ; <, so the phase $as not that deep) +n order to #aintain the phase, + i##ediately started chaotically touching everything around #e) +t helped) Gision ca#e, though it $as #ur%y) + then found #yself in #y apart#ent) + decided to strive to deepen) 7ach ti#e that + e,ercised that techni9ue, the phase "eca#e deeper and deeper) .fter + had achieved a sta"le phase, + decided that it $ould "e good to gra" a snac% and headed for the fridge) + should add that + $as on a strict diet at the ti#e and $as craving so#ething s$eet or fried) 5o$ever, $hen + opened the fridge, + $as 9uite disappointed) There $as a lot of food in the fridge, "ut all of it re9uired preparation Cra$ #eat, fish, dill, etc)0) 5o$ever, there $as a "ottle of spar%ling #ineral $ater on a special lo$er shelf in the fridge) :ithout giving it any thought, + too% the "ottle and started to chug it) .ll of the sensations $ere 6ust as in real life/ + felt the "u""les fro# the car"onation, that peculiar taste that #ineral $ater has, and also ho$ the $ater $ent do$n #y throat) +n general, everything $as 9uite realistic, though there $as no 1.)
sensation of #y sto#ach filling up $ith $ater and, #oreover, the $ater felt so#e$hat dry) +t sounds funny, "ut that very feeling of $ater3s dryness spoiled #y overall i#pression so#e$hat) .fter a foul, + reali1ed that a possi"le reason for this #ight have "een dryness in the #outh of #y real "ody) 'sually, if there are, for e,a#ple, candies in the %itchen or in the fridge, + actually ta%e a handful of the# and consu#e the# $hile traveling through the phase) .fter going to the fridge, + $anted to see so#ething interesting) + decided to e#ploy the techni9ue for creating o"6ects and people, and so + closed #y eyes and focused on the i#age of a girl $ho# + $anted to see at that very #o#ent) + affir#ed #y desire, and + then opened #y eyes, concentrating on the area to #y side) The air gre$ #isty at first, and then the person + $as e,pecting #ateriali1ed out of the air, and ca#e to life, see#ingly fully autono#ous and $ith free $ill - she had the sa#e #anner of spea%ing as in real life, and acted in the sa#e $ay) The foul happened $hile #y conversation $ith the girl $as in full s$ingP 2ue#tio$#& ,hich type of the techni'ue did 6le1ei ultimately useJ ,hy did lethargy and drowsiness arise during phantom wigglingJ ,hat should be done in this type of situationJ ,hat was most likely lacking when the indirect techni'ue was performed< and why did the e1perience end with 6le1ei falling asleepJ ,hat techni'ues for deepening were usedJ ,hat could ha9e been done to 'uickly fill the fridge with ready0to0eat foodJ ,hich techni'ue for finding an ob5ect was used with regard to the girlJ ,hat else could ha9e been used for the same purpose< considering 6le1eiCs actionsJ ,hat should ha9e been done immediately after the foulJ =ow many practical applications of the phase did 6le1ei manage to tryJ A$#:er# a$d %omme$t#& The entry to the phase happened because 6le1ei had become aware that he was dreaming while he rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and drowsiness o9er the course of the unsuccessful attempt with the indirect techni'ue of phantom wiggling. 7sually< such drowsiness signifies that a phase is approaching< signaling a need for aggression< acti9eness and attention in order to o9ercome inertia and enter the phase. =owe9er< attenti9eness was lacking< so 1.+
6le1ei fell asleep. =owe9er< his desire to enter the phase was so strong that the phantom wiggling continued e9en while he was dreaming< causing him to e1perience dream consciousness. 6mong techni'ues employed for deepening were sensory amplification through touching and 5ogging. &t would ha9e been sufficient to employ the techni'ue of finding through a door to ensure that the fridge was properly stocked. 4or e1ample< 6le1ei should ha9e closed the door on the refrigerator< focused his attention on a full stock of snacks and food< and then opened the door to disco9er that e9erything he8d en9isioned was there. The techni'ue for finding an ob5ect through transformation was used to make the girl appear< but this techni'ue should be considered only by e1perienced practitioners because it can lead to a foul in case of insufficient concentration. %efore employing the techni'ue< 6le1ei shut his eyes< and only then imagined the girl right in front of him. =e could ha9e immediately created her using the techni'ue of closed eyes< which usually is easier to do since there is no direct 9isual contact with surroundings. 7pon returning to his body< he should ha9e tried to separate again. 6ltogether< 6le1ei managed to and make progress in two specific< applied tasks< though did not complete them satisfactorily. )4)(%IS)S 'O( %-APT)( 12 Ta#!# Try to assess the e1periences described abo9e using the rubric below. The answers are located in the appendi1. =-Poi$t Sy#tem for A##e##i$g the 2uality of Out-of-Body )?"erie$ce# 7Pha#e#8 *eliberate entry into the phase using any techni'ue The phase world was realistic or was made realistic Phase was of a9erage or abo9e0a9erage duration :2 minutes or more; *eliberate use of the phase to work towards a specific 1.5
P1 P1 P1 P1
goal *eliberately studying the phase or e1perimenting with it P1 while in it. &f there is some doubt any regarding any item< only half a point should be awarded.
1.-
%ha"ter 1@ - Putti$g a 'ace o$ the Phe$ome$o$

ST)P-). 1AB)(G) !tephen Da%erge was born in 1.+( in the 7nited !tates. 6t the age of 1.< he recei9ed a %achelor8s *egree in mathematics from 6ri>ona !tate 7ni9ersity< after which he enrolled as a graduate student in the "hemistry program at !tanford 7ni9ersity. &n 1.-.< he took an academic lea9e of absence. =e returned to !tanford in 1.(( and began studying the human mind< including sub5ects related to dreaming. Da%erge recei9ed his Ph.*. in psychophysiology in 1.32. =e founded the Ducidity &nstitute in 1.3(. !tephen Da%erge has made the largest scientific contribution to the study of phase states. &t suffices to say that Da%erge was the first in the world to pro9e during a full0fledged scientific e1periment that it is possible to become conscious while dreaming This was done through logging specific signals made with the eyes by a person dreaming while sleeping under measurement instruments. These e1periments also pro9ed that eye mo9ement in the physical body and percei9ed body are synchronous. Mucid 8rea#ing< first published in 1.35< is Da%ergeCs most well0known book. 7,ploring the :orld of Mucid 8rea#ing, a book that Da%erge wrote with =oward Rheingold< was published in 1..2. &t was mainly thanks to the efforts of Da%erge that mind0machines for achie9ing dream consciousness were created< such as *reamDight< /o9a*reamer< and *reamMaker. 1.(
The key feature of Da%erge8s work and achie9ements is an absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon. 6rguably< he is one of the few authors and researchers totally lacking in irrationality. 9erything that can be read and learned from his books is 9erifiable and accessible for e9eryone< with no peddling of out0of0this0world superpowers. %A(1OS %ASTA.)+A *ue to "arlos "astaneda8s desire to follow the spiritual practice of the ,arrior8s Path< which entails erasing one8s personal history< the details of his biography are unclear. 6s far as "astaneda8s early years are concerned< it can only be stated that he was born outside of the 7nited !tates sometime between 1.25 and 1.)5. =e enrolled at the 7ni9ersity of "alifornia< Dos 6ngeles :7"D6; in the 1.-2s< where he recei9ed a Ph.*. in anthropology on the basis of his books. "astaneda8s entire life path was de9oted to studying the teachings of a certain Luan Matus or don Luan "achora. &t is more than likely that his persona is a composite0image of an &ndian !haman< a sorcerer< and an heir of the culture of the ancient AToltecsB. "astaneda wrote a do>en books@ howe9er< the book The .rt of 8rea#ing :1..); has the most to do with the phase state. &t contains se9eral effecti9e techni'ues for entering the phase through dream consciousness. =is sub5ect matter is soaked in a large amount of mysticism and 9irtually de9oid of any pragmatism. *espite the fact that the main orientation of "astaneda8s work did not touch upon the phase state< he ne9ertheless became one of the founding fathers of this field< as his general popularity reached massi9e proportions worldwide. "arlos "astaneda passed away in 1..3. (OB)(T A< /O.(O) 1.3
Robert Monroe was born in the 7nited !tates in 1.15. &n 1.)(< he graduated from Ohio !tate 7ni9ersity with a degree in ngineering. =e worked for some time as a radio program producer and director until he established his own radio company in /ew Oork< which rapidly e1panded. &n 1.5-< his company also conducted a study about the effect of sound wa9es on the abilities of the mind. &n 1.53< Monroe had an accidental personal e1perience with the phase phenomenon< which strongly stoked his interest in the sub5ect to which he would de9ote his entire career. &n 1.(+< he founded the Monroe &nstitute< which was entirely de9oted to studying unusual states of consciousness and the ability to influence them through audio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main achie9ements was the creation of the =emi0!ync system< which was designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness< including out0of0body states< by synchroni>ing the two hemispheres of the brain. =is first book< Journeys Out of the Body< was published in 1.(1. Two books then followed? Far Journeys :1.35; and 'lti#ate Journey :1..+;. Robert Monroe has< so far< made the largest contribution toward populari>ing the phase state. =owe9er< he understood the phase more as an actual e1it of the mind from the body< which is why the term Aout0of0body e1perienceB :O% ; was introduced. The book Journeys Out of the Body was such a massi9e success that Monroe 'uickly became an undisputed authority in the field. =owe9er< the large influence of mysticism on Monroe8s work and 9iews cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second book. The ma5ority of phenomena described in the book ha9e not been 9erified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full0fledged scientific e1periment pro9ing that the mind left the body was unsuccessful. &n the end< typical misconceptions about the phase became widespread< as did awareness of the e1istence of out0of0body e1periences. 1..
Robert Monroe passed away in 1..5. PAT(I%IA GA('I)1+ Patricia $arfield was born in 1.)+ in the 7nited !tates. 4rom the age of 1+< she kept an uninterrupted daily dream 5ournal that would allow her and all of humanity great insight into dreams phenomena associated with the phase. !he was one of the founders of The 6ssociation for the !tudy of *reams. *r. $arfield holds a Ph.*. in clinical psychology. !he is the author of a great number of books< with the 1.(+ best0seller ?reative 8rea#ing being the most widely lauded. &t was one of the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical and non0specialist way< and recei9ed worldwide interest and appreciation. The book contains good practical guidelines and also describes the dreaming practices of 9arious cultures. SY16A. /U1+OO. !yl9an Muldoon was born in the 7nited !tates in 1.2). =e is considered to be the 6merican pioneer in the study of the phase< although he used the esoteric term astral. =e inad9ertently woke up in the phase at the age of 12< where he saw a cord connecting his percei9ed body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that he was dying during the e1perience< although he e9entually concluded that this was an instance of Aastral pro5ectionB. =e had repeated e1perience with the phenomenon< but Muldoon was still unable to become an ad9anced practitioner due to a lack of full control o9er the practice. 6fter coordinating efforts with =ereward "arrington< the famous 6merican in9estigator of the unknown< the two published the sensational< 5ointly authored book The Fro6ection of the .stral 222
Body in 1.2.. The authors published two other books? The ?ase for .stral Fro6ection :1.)-; and The Fheno#ena of .stral Fro6ection :1.51;. *espite a large ser9ing of esotericism< Muldoon8s books< :especially the first one; contain a lot of helpful< practical information and e1planation of the most di9erse phenomena that can occur during the phase. =owe9er< Muldoon is considered to be the greatest populari>er of irrational esoteric terms and theories< which subse'uently became 'uite widespread. !yl9an Muldoon passed away in 1.(1. %-A(1)S 1)A+B)AT)( "harles Deadbeater was born in ngland in 13+( :135+ according to some sources;. 6fter dropping out of O1ford due to hard times< Deadbeater became an ordained priest< but then became 'uite acti9e in the occult. This led to his becoming a member of the Theosophical !ociety in 133). Deadbeater became one of its most famous participants. The combination of a bright mind< scientific knowledge< and interest in the paranormal led him to publish many books on many di9erse topics. One of them< 8rea#s/ :hat They .re and 5o$ They .re ?aused :13.3;< was one of the first works to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase. Deadbeater8s writing is saddled with a ton of esoteric terms and theories. &n it< the term astral plane is predominantly used for the phase. /e9ertheless< the book is not without some helpful guidelines concerning techni'ues. "harles Deadbeater passed away in 1.)+. (OB)(T B(U%) Robert %ruce was born in ngland in 1.55. =e has performed his lifeCs work while li9ing in 6ustralia. 6fter studying and promoting dissociati9e phenomena for many years< by the beginning of the 21st century he had become one of the leading 221
authorities in the field. =e is also a specialist in many other paranormal fields of study. Robert %ruce wrote se9eral books< the most important and well known of which is .stral 8yna#ics :1...;. The author holds 'uite open esoteric 9iews< which are 9ery strongly reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful< practical guidelines in his books are 'uite often loaded with a large amount of information that has not been 9erified or pro9en by anyone. Robert %ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes concerning the phase phenomenon. (I%-A(+ *)BST)( Richard ,ebster was born in /ew Qealand< where he still resides. =e is the author of about 52 publications that ha9e sold many millions of copies around the world. =owe9er< only one of them< .stral Travel for Beginners< is completely de9oted to the phase state. The book is saturated with widespread misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and misguided theories trying to e1plain it. The techni'ue0related aspect of the book is also presented ineffecti9ely. &t is 'uite likely that the author himself has no practical e1perience< which can also be said for the contents of his other do>ens of books de9oted to 9arious topics. %-A(1)S TA(T "harles Tart was born in the 7nited !tates in 1.)(. =e recei9ed his Ph. *. in psychology in 1.-) at the 7ni9ersity of /orth "arolina. Tart also recei9ed training at !tanford 7ni9ersity. =e was one of the founders of transpersonal psychology. 222
=e became one of the most preeminent researchers of unusual states of awareness after the publication of .ltered States of ?onsciousness :1.-.;< the first book that he worked on. &t was one of the first books to e1amine entering the phase through dream consciousness. The book recei9ed popularity when the use D!* and Mari5uana were often 9iewed as 9ehicles to ele9ated consciousness< and the book e9en describes the use of chemical substances in the conte1t of phase states.
22)
%ha"ter 1A , 'i$al Te#t

The 'uestions on the test may ha9e one or more correct answers< or none of the answers may be correct. Thus< the 'uestions must be read completely through< and attention must be paid to their implications and finer points. 6 student8s theoretical knowledge is considered to be satisfactory if the correct answers to at least one0half of the 'uestions are gi9en. &f a score of less than 52E is recei9ed< a student should study the weak points again or re0read the entire guidebook. Otherwise< it is 'uite probable that fundamental mistakes will be made< which will in turn interfere with indi9idual practice. &f a score of at least 32E is achie9ed< then a theoretical knowledge of the practice is at an ad9anced le9el< which will surely ha9e a positi9e effect on the practitioner8s direct e1periences in the phase. 6nswers are in the appendi1 at the end of the guidebook. 1< .oi#e a$d reali#tic image# u$e?"ectedly ari#e :he$ "erformi$g the i$direct tech$i5ue of "ha$tom :iggli$g< *hat ca$ e do$e0 6; "ontinue with phantom wiggling. %; !witch to obser9ing images or listening in. "; Try to do all or some of the techni'ues simultaneously. *; "hoose the techni'ue with the strongest precursors and continue with that one.
22+
2< A "ractitio$er u$i$te$tio$ally o"e$# the eye# for #everal #eco$d# u"o$ a:a!e$i$g< *hat i# the e#t :ay to #tart i$direct tech$i5ue# from i$ thi# ca#e0 6; 6ttempting to separate. %; The obser9ing images techni'ue. "; The rapid eye mo9ement techni'ue. *; The forced falling asleep techni'ue. ; &t8s best to not start any techni'ue and fall back to sleep with the intention of reawakening and trying to do e9erything again without first mo9ing. @< *hich actio$# are "refera le for "erformi$g a direct tech$i5ue efore falli$g a#lee" for the $ight after a lo$g "eriod of #lee" de"rivatio$ or e?hau#tio$0 6; Monotonously performing the obser9ing images techni'ue. %; %eing attenti9e and concentrating on actions. "; The absence of a free0floating state of consciousness. *; Nuickly alternating techni'ues. ; =igh0'uality rela1ation. A< /ild vi ratio$# occur :he$ "erformi$g a direct tech$i5ue< %a$ the #trai$i$g the rai$ tech$i5ue e u#ed to am"lify the vi ratio$#0 6; Oes. %; /o. "; &t may be used< but for practical purposes 0 only when a practitioner is e1hausted or sleep0depri9ed. *;&t may be used< as long as the attempt to enter the phase is not being made during the day =< *hich of the actio$# give$ elo: i$crea#e the li!elihood of e$teri$g the "ha#e through dream co$#ciou#$e## :he$ u#ed right efore falli$g a#lee"0 6; Performing direct techni'ues. %; &ntending to perform indirect techni'ues upon awakening. "; Recalling dreams from the night before. 225
*; "reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to the phase in such a way. C< If a:are$e## occur# at the very la#t mome$t of a dream that fade# a:ay; :hich of the actio$# give$ elo: #hould e u$derta!e$ i$ order to e$ter the "ha#e a# #oo$ a# "o##i le0 6; Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become self0aware while dreaming. %; &mmediately perform indirect techni'ues. "; Take a break and perform direct techni'ues later. *; !tart to recall that night8s dreams. D< *hich of the#e are mo#t li!ely to "roduce a 5uic! "ha#e e$try :he$ a:a!e$i$g i$ a #tate of #lee" "araly#i#0 6; Rela1ation. %; 4alling asleep with the intention of becoming self0 aware while in a dream. "; Mo9ing the physical eyes and tongue. *; *irect techni'ues. E< *hat #hould e do$e :he$ #"o$ta$eou#ly thro:$ from the ody :hile lyi$g do:$ or :a!i$g u" i$ the middle of the $ight0 6; Return to the body and perform appropriate separation techni'ues. %; &mplement a predetermined plan of action for the phase. "; *eepen immediately. *; Try to 'uickly establish 9ision< if it is not already present. *; mploy the forced falling asleep techni'ue. G< *hile tryi$g to e$ter the "ha#e; rolli$g out :or!# at fir#t; ut o$ly "artially; a$d the moveme$t ca$$ot e e?te$ded a$y further $o matter :hat effort i# made< *hat i# it e#t to do i$ thi# #ituatio$0 6; Try to turn back and roll out further once again< and repeat se9eral times. 22-
%; !tart doing cycles of indirect techni'ues. "; Take a break and try to separate after se9eral minutes. *; Try to separate by le9itating< getting up< or climbing out. ; 7se any indirect techni'ue for phase entry and attempt rolling out again. 10< A "ractitio$er u$e?"ectedly get# #tuc! i$ the floor or :all :hile rolli$g out< *hat #hould e do$e to re#ume the "ha#e0 6; 4orce through the obstacle. %; mploy translocation techni'ues. "; 6ttempt to return to the body and roll out again. *; %ecome able to locate an e1it from the problem. ; Perform sensory amplification. 11< -o: may a "ractitio$er dee"e$ the "ha#e :hile flyi$g through a dar! formle## #"ace :hile #e"arati$g0 6; mploy the techni'ue of falling headfirst. %; There is no way to do this. "; "reate and amplify 9ibrations. *; %egin self0palpation. ; Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it through sensory amplification. 12< If dee"e$i$g tech$i5ue# do $ot com"letely :or! :ithi$ 1= to @0 #eco$d#; :hat ca$ e do$e0 6; "ontinue trying to go deeper. %; 1it from the phase. "; 6ttempt to return to the body and once use phase entrance techni'ues. *; Proceed to performing predetermined actions. 1@< *hich tech$i5ue or :ay of mai$tai$i$g the "ha#e #hould e u#ed :he$ tele"orti$g #ome:here :ith clo#ed eye#0 6; The techni'ue of amplifying and maintaining 9ibrations. 22(
%; Tactile sensory amplification< feeling the sensation of rubbing the hands together. "; /o techni'ue. *; The techni'ue of rotation. ; Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase. 1A< I$ :hich #ituatio$# i# falli$g a#lee" i$ the "ha#e mo#t li!ely0 6; ,hen looking for a desired person. %; ,hen communicating with animate ob5ects. "; ,hen completely calm< ha9ing completely halted all acti9ity. *; ,hen tra9elling aimlessly. ; ,hen taking part in side e9ents. 1=< *hich of the follo:i$g i$dicator# guara$tee# that the "ha#e ha# ee$ e?ited for reality0 6; 6 clock shows the right time< and the same time e9en if a practitioner turns away from it and then looks at it again. %; !ensations are completely realistic. "; The presence of friends or family in the room who communicate with the practitioner. *; 6n inner feeling that the phase has ended. ; /othing happens after staring at the end of a finger from close distance for fi9e to 12 seconds. 1C< I$ :hich #ituatio$# #hould travelli$g i$ the "ha#e e deli erately di#co$ti$ued0 6; ,hen a fear that a return will be impossible< or a direct fear of death arises. %; ,hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner will be late for something in the physical world. "; ,hen frightened by some strange e9ents or ob5ects. *; ,hen there is an ine1plicable mortal fear of something unknown or incomprehensible. ; &f someone in the phase strongly insists that the practitioner should return to reality. 223
4; &f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by interaction with ob5ects in the phase world. 1D< *hat :ill mo#t li!ely occur :he$ tryi$g to evade #ome a:ful ei$g or da$gerou# "er#o$0 6; The ob5ect will get bored and stop. %; 4ear of the ob5ect will go away. "; The phase will occur more fre'uently< as well as be longer and deeper than usual. *; The practitioner will become calmer and unner9ed less fre'uently. ; The more fear there is< the more often the ob5ect will chase the practitioner. 1E< *he$ #hould e#ta li#hi$g vi#io$ i$ the "ha#e e co$#idered; if it ha# $ot occurred o$ it# o:$0 6; &mmediately upon separation without deepening. %; &mmediately after deepening. "; ,hile flying through dark space during translocation. *; 6fter fi9e to 12 seconds of being sure that a phase entry has occurred. ; ,hen there is a desire to immediately e1plore the surroundings after separation has occurred. 1G< -o: i# it "o##i le to "a## through a :all :hile #ta$di$g clo#e to it; :ithout #to""i$g to loo! at it from clo#e ra$ge0 6; %y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it< and then the entire body and head. %; %y gradually pushing the head through it at first< and then the entire body. "; %y trying to put a hole in it< and then e1panding the hole and climbing through it. *; %y ramming it with a shoulder< trying to bring it down. 20< *hile i$ the "ha#e; a "ractitio$er i# i$ a #ituatio$ :here the arm# are totally "araly>ed a$d immo ili>ed< Thi# ha""e$# 22.
i$ a room :ith a #i$gle e?it& a door that ha# #tarted to clo#e< *hat are the t:o ea#ie#t :ay# to !ee" the door o"e$0 6; Order the door to stay open in a loud< imperious< and asserti9e manner. %; 4ree the arms and hold back the door. "; !top the door with telekinesis. *; "reate a person through the method of finding. ; There is no way to do this. 21< *hat difficultie# may ari#e for a "ractitio$er i$ the "ha#e :hile u#i$g the door tech$i5ue of tra$#locatio$0 6; The door will not open. %; The wrong place is behind the door. "; &t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle because the hand goes through the handle. *; *ifficulties with internal concentration occur at the critical moment. ; 6 black 9oid often appears on the other side of the door. 22< *hat are $ece##ary co$ditio$# for getti$g re#ult# :he$ tra$#locati$g i$ the "ha#e after rolli$g out duri$g i$itial #e"aratio$ from the ody0 6; 6bsence of 9ision. %; Practicing after sunset. "; 6 firm intention to end up somewhere. *; "ertainty of the final result. ; The presence of 9ibrations. 2@< A "ractitio$er i# i$ a dar! room i$ the "ha#e :here everythi$g i# "oorly vi#i le< There i# a cha$delier; ut $o light #:itch< -o: ca$ the #:itch e activated to light the room0 6; Translocate through teleportation to the place where the toggle or switch for the light in 'uestion is located. %; 4ind a flashlight through the method of finding and illuminate the room with it. "; Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier with the hands. 212
*; "reate a light switch in the room using the method of finding an ob5ect. ; "lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit< and then open the eyes. 2A< *he$ commu$icati$g :ith a$ a$imate o Hect i$ the "ha#e; a de#ire to add a #"ecific "er#o$ to the #ce$ery ari#e#< *hich of the follo:i$g actio$# are advi#a le o$ly for egi$$er# i$ thi# ca#e0 6; Propose going to a neighboring room where the needed sub5ect will be presented through the use of the door or corner techni'ue. %; !ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly. "; Translocate back to the same place< and ha9e both animate ob5ects present there upon your return. *; 6dd the needed person through the closed eyes techni'ue. ; 6sk the animate ob5ect that you are talking to if it does not mind adding someone to the scenery. 2=< *here i# o$e $ot allo:ed to go u#i$g tra$#locatio$ tech$i5ue#0 6; &nside a mammoth. %; To the past or the future. "; To hea9en. *; To an episode of the mo9ie Star :ars. 2C< -o: :ill a decea#ed "er#o$ differ from a "rototy"e i$ the "ha#e :he$ correctly "erformi$g the tech$i5ue for fi$di$g the "er#o$0 6; Only the practitioner himself can con5ure up differences< or not see or percei9e them. %; The deceased will ha9e a different timbre of 9oice. "; There will be a radiant halo around the deceased8s head. *; Physical perception of the deceased will be less realistic than in real life. 211
; The deceased will not remember anything. 2D< *hat difficultie# ca$ ari#e i$ the "ha#e :hile o tai$i$g i$formatio$ from a$imate #ource# of i$formatio$0 6; &nability to remember information obtained. %; !ources of information are silent. "; &nade'uateness of the sources of information. *; !e1ual attraction< if the source of information is of the opposite or desired se1. ; %eing gi9en false information. 2E< -o: might a "ractitio$er accelerate the heali$g "roce## of a cold that i# characteri>ed y a #tuffy $o#e a$d a #ore throat0 6; Maintaining and amplifying 9ibrations for the entire length of the phase< and entering it o9er se9eral days in a row. %; Taking aspirin and entering the phase o9er se9eral days in a row. "; Tra9elling to hot places in the phase and entering it o9er se9eral days in a row. *; 1periencing stressful situations o9er se9eral phases. ; 4inding a doctor in the phase and asking him what it is best to do in real0life or e9en in the phase itself. 2G< *hich of the follo:i$g achieveme$t# elo$g to Ste"he$ 1aBerge0 6; 4ounding the Ducidity &nstitute. %; 6 Ph.*. in anthropology. "; !cientifically pro9ing that lucid dreaming is possible. *; 6 Ph.*. in psychophysiology. ; Pro9ing that eye mo9ements in the phase and in reality are synchroni>ed. @0< *ho of a""roached the #tudy of the "ha#e #tate from a "ragmatic "oi$t-of-vie: that :a# totally devoid of occulti#m0 6; !tephen Da%erge %; Robert Monroe "; !yl9an Muldoon 212
*; "harles Deadbeater ; Patricia $arfield 4; "arlos "astaneda
21)
A""e$di?
ASS)SS/).T O' P(A%TITIO.)(SI )4P)(I).%)S 7%-APT)( 128 These assessments of the practitioners8 e1periences refer only to the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as an assessment of their practice as a whole. !ome of practitioners would easily be able to e1perience successful phases earning four to fi9e points at other times. This especially concerns %oris Pronyakin< 6le1ander *yrenko9< %oris %ender< and 6le1ei Teslenko. This is also possibly true of the other practitioners< with whom the author is not closely ac'uainted. /o. 1 %oris Pronyakin # 2.5 points /o. 2 6le1ei %akhare9 # 2.5 points /o. ) *mitry Marko9 # 2 points /o. + &9an Oako9le9 # 1.5 points /o. 5 /atalya Ho>heno9a # 1 point /o. - 6le1ander 4urmenko9 # 1 point /o.( Roman Reuto9 # ) points /o. 3 6le1ander *yrenko9 # 1.5 points /o. . !9yatosla9 %arano9 # 2 points /o. 12 Oleg !ushchenko # 2.5 points /o. 11 6le1ander Deleko9 # 1.5 points /o. 12 %oris %ender # 2 points /o. 1) 6le1ei Teslenko # ) points
21+
A.S*)(S TO T-) 'I.A1 T)ST 7%-APT)( 1A8 1. 6<%<"<* @ 2. *@ ). %< "< *@ +. "@ 5. 6<%<"<* @ -. %@ (. # 3. "@ .. 6< *< @ 12. %< "@ 11. 6<"<*< @ 12. 6<*<6P *@ 1). "@ 1+. *< @ 15. @ 1-. %< 4@ 1(. "< @ 13. %< *@ 1.. # 22. 6< "@ 21. 6< %< *@ 22. 6< "< *@ 2). @ 2+. %@ 25. #@ 2-. 6@ 2(. %<"<*< @ 23. %<"< @ 2.. 6<"<*< @ )2. 6< @
A SI/P1I'I)+ +)S%(IPTIO. O' T-) )ASI)ST /)T-O+ 'O( ).T)(I.G T-) P-AS) USI.G I.+I()%T T)%-.I2U)S 7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening the eyes< immediately try to separate from oneCs body. The separation attempt should be carried out without any imagining< but rather with the desire to make a real mo9ement without straining the muscles :rolling out< le9itation< standing up< etc.;. &f separation does not occur within three to fi9e seconds< immediately try alternating se9eral of the most effecti9e techni'ues for three to fi9e seconds each. ,hen one of the techni'ues works< continue it for a longer period of time? 0Obser9ing images? Try to e1amine and discern the pictures arising before closed eyes. 0Distening in? 6ttempt to hear sounds in the head and make these louder by listening in or strengthening the will@ 0Rotating? &magine rotating around the head0to0foot a1is@ 0Phantom wiggling? Try to mo9e a part of the body without straining the muscles< and try to increase the range of mo9ement@
215
0!training the brain? Try straining the brain< which will lead to 9ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain. 6s soon as one techni'ue clearly starts to work< continue with it as long as progress is apparent< and then try to separate. &f separation fails< return to the techni'ue that was working. *o not gi9e up alternating through techni'ues until one minute has elapsed< but do not continue for more than two minutes. !eparation from the body may be attempted periodically< especially if interesting sensations occur. TA3) PA(T I. ()S)A(%Take part in the research of a techni'ue. The techni'ue of imagined sensations is described in "hapter 2 in the section on !econdary Techni'ues. This techni'ue is also commonly known as the Acell phone techni'ueB. ,hile this guidebook was being written< e1periments with this techni'ue were conducted at the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el8s seminars. Results were astounding. *ue to the fact that this techni'ue is easy to understand and apply in practice< it could be the most straightforward and effecti9e one for achie9ing the phase state. 6lmost e9ery second attempt made with this techni'ue has yielded results< pro9ided it is employed as an indirect techni'ue. *ue to this techni'ue8s huge potential for populari>ing and spreading knowledge of the phenomenon< anyone who is interested is in9ited to take part in a global e1periment of the techni'ue8s effecti9eness. &n addition to testing it< a researcher may propose the techni'ue to interested persons or post it on the &nternet to increase the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your e1periments with the techni'ue to the e0mail address? obe4u@obe4u.com =ere it is? T-) %)11 P-O.) T)%-.I2U)
21-
The practice of this phase entry techni'ue is to imagine the sensation that something is resting in the hand< desirably upon awakening without any physical mo9ement. &t is best to imagine a cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 'uite accustomed to this sensation< although any other ob5ect will do. &t is necessary to acti9ely and attenti9ely focus on the sensations in the palm of the hand. Most likely< the physical sensation of a phone lying in the hand will 'uickly arise. The sensation will become increasingly palpable. &f a sensation does not arise within 12 seconds< the techni'ue not going to work and it is time to switch to another one. ,hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs< focus e9ery bit of attention on it. &t should be noted that this will not be an imagined sensation< but a real one. This should be understood from the 9ery beginning< and results should be e1pected. Once the sensation is stable< start feeling the mobile phone with the fingers. Physical sensations should be e1perienced. The physical body< of course< must not mo9e or strain. &f this does not work< only focus attention on the sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone with the fingers later. &f feeling the phone with the fingers is successful< acti9ely roll the phone around the hand< feeling all of its details. 6s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand< separation from the body may be attempted. &n this case it is usually easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. "ontinue to hold the phone and roll it around< which will maintain the emerging phase state. !eparation in this case should be more like actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed< rather than actually separating one thing from something else. That is< do this in the same way as physically getting out of bed< starting from the sensation of the phone in the hand. &f separation is unsuccessful< continue to attenti9ely feel the phone in the hand for a little while longer and try to separate again. &f separation happens< the ne1t step is to take actions that are typical for a phase e1perience? deepening< and then accomplishing predetermined tasks while performing AmaintainingB techni'ues. &f only a partial separation occurs< then separation by force should be attempted. 21(
$enerally< the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises with e9ery second attempt. 4urthermore< achie9ing success only re'uires e1perience and some de1terity since feeling the sensation of a phone in the hand signifies that the re'uired state has been reached and subse'uent actions may be attempted. ATT).TIO.B ,hen making attempts to enter the phase< the practitioner should ha9e complete confidence that he will be immediately successful in e9erything. 9en a shroud of doubt will keep the practitioner in his body< this is especially true when it comes to indirect techni'ues. 4our typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by .2E of practicioners? 1 0 4orgetting to deepen the phase 2 0 4orgetting to maintain the phase ) 0 6bsence of a plan of action when in the phase + 0 4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after a foul T-) S%-OO1 O' OUT-O'-BO+Y T(A6)1
Michael Raduga8s !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el conducts training seminars in many countries around the world. The coursework allows students to master the phase phenomenon and hone their skills at tra9eling in the phase. &nformation on e1isting 213
branches and seminar schedules are a9ailable on the website www.obe4u.com. ,e also welcome potential partners interested in organi>ing !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el branches and seminars. 6ll correspondence regarding seminars< partnerships< and proposals related to the translation of this book may be handled by e0mail at obe4u@obe4u.com . B(I)' G1OSSA(Y O' T)(/S A.+ +)'I.ITIO.S Out-of-Body e?"erie$ce 7OB)8; lucid dreami$g 71+8; a#tral , a number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in which a person< while being fully conscious< reali>es consciousness outside the normal range of physical perception. $direct tech$i5ue# # entry into the phase within fi9e minutes of awakening from sleep of any duration 0 pro9ided there has been minimal physical mo9ement. +irect tech$i5ue# # entry into the phase without any prior sleep< after e1cessi9e physical mo9ement upon awakening< or ha9ing been awake for at least fi9e minutes. +ream %o$#ciou#$e## # entry into the phase through becoming consciously aware while a dream episode is happening. +i##ociatio$ # separation@ in this case< a scientific term describing e1periences in the phase. Slee" "araly#i# # a stupor@ the complete immobili>ation that often occurs when falling asleep< awakening< and entering or e1iting the phase. Ste$cil # the real physical body that is no longer percei9ed while in the phase. +ee"e$i$g the "ha#e # methods for making the phase as realistic as possible by stabili>ing the surrounding space. /ai$tai$i$g the "ha#e # methods for maintaining the phase state by pre9enting a lapse into sleep< a return to reality< or an imagined return to reality. ()/ # rapid eye mo9ement sleep :R M phase;@ a sleep phase that is characteri>ed by increased brain acti9ity that is accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement and dreaming. 21.
'oul # an inad9ertent termination of the phase through a spontaneous return to e9eryday reality. %ycle# of i$direct tech$i5ue# 00 the easiest way to enter the phase< employed by rapidly alternating certain techni'ues upon awakening from sleep until one of them works.
222
%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com U1TI/AT) YOGA T-) T)%-.O1OGY O' T-) 2012 T(A.S'O(/ATIO. :%uy on www.obe+u.com; The lines of this book will close out the life you ha9e led thus far. Oou ha9e in front of you a gap0closing< cutting0edge and conscious0awareness raising technology that will allow you to complete your transformation into the new era. &ts moderni>ed< secular approach to these ancient technologies brings conscious awareness outside of the physical world within e9eryoneCs reach. Thanks to the de9elopment of simple technical instruments< the practice of freeing oneCs conscious awareness from the body opens up the widest0possible hori>ons and is the most promising personal de9elopment technology in e1istence. & say this for the simple reason there is nothing more useful and pro9ocati9e out there. This is the long0awaited ne1t step in human e9olutionary de9elopment. The e1plosi9e propagation of this practice will also be the trigger for the 2212 transformation. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel Table of "ontents? %ha"ter 1 !uperpowers Made 6ccessible %ha"ter 2 ntering the Out0of0%ody !tate %ha"ter @ Managing the Out0of0%ody 1perience 221
%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com %ha"ter A Practical 6pplications %ha"ter = The 1periences of %eginners
S%-OO1 O' OUT-O'-BO+Y-T(A6)1 II P)(SO.A1 )4P)(I).%)S Thi# oo! i# the free#ta$di$g #u""leme$t to The School of Out-of-Body Travel I A Practical Guideboo ! It i# i$te$ded to give a fir#t-ha$d demo$#tratio$ of the out-of- ody e?"erie$ce i$ "ractice; :hile ri$gi$g atte$tio$ to correct actio$# a$d mi#ta!e# made :he$ out-of- ody< :%uy on www.obe+u.com; &t8s one thing to know which techni'ues can be used to control and lea9e the perception of the body< but another thing to actually know how to use those techni'ues. &t8s one thing to read descriptions of a single indi9idual8s e1periences< but another to learn about how a large number of other practitioners regard the techni'ues and feel about them. /ot e9eryone is able to figure out what e1actly to do and how to do it without reading this book. Techni'ue0related theory and real e1perience are essentially two different things. The power inherent in this collection of personal practitioner e1periences is such that e9en if you ne9er intend to try out the techni'ues described in it< you are practically guaranteed to ne9ertheless encounter this phenomenon< as it will enter your subconscious mind as a kind of programming that will sooner or later acti9ate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial for those who would like to recei9e real guidance in their e1plorations. 6ll of the fundamental mistakes that practitioners are prone to make are described and analy>ed 222
%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com here. =a9ing read the book< the practitioner will be armed with knowledge of the most distilled and 9erified kind. &n preparation for this book< the personal e1periences of hundreds of practitioners were collected at seminars< through the website< and by mail. =owe9er< only the most demonstrati9e descriptions were chosen for inclusion. Thus< the selected descriptions are in9aluable not only for those who ha9e 5ust started out on their 5ourney with the most e1traordinary practice of out0of0body tra9el< but also for those who already ha9e substantial e1perience with it. & would like to e1press my gratitude to all those who assisted me in putting together this one0of0a0kind compilation. Oou ha9e made a contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to wish you further success< which will show that my commentary on your e1periences was right on. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel Table of "ontents? Part 1 Dea9ing the Perception of the %ody Part II Out0of0%ody 1periments Part III The 1periences of ,ell0Hnown 6uthors Part I6 *emonstrati9e "ase !tudies A""e$di?
22)
Buy hard co"y of thi# e- oo! o$

www.obe4u.com
This book is free via internet, so feel free to distribute it! Send it to all your friends! Post it on your sites and blogs!
Semi$ar# i$ %alifor$ia&
http://school.obe4u.com/
www.obe4u.com
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other works of M.Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com
22+

Ultimate Yoga 2012. Free E-Book

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ultimate Yoga 2012. Free E-Book

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ultimate Yoga 2012

I School of Out-of-Body Travel

Buy hard co"y of thi# e- oo! o$

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

Part 1 )$teri$g the Pha#e State

%ha"ter 1 , Ge$eral Bac!grou$d

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%ha"ter 2 , I$direct Tech$i5ue#

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%ha"ter @ , +irect Tech$i5ue#

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%uy hard co"y of this e0book on www.obe4u.com